JP7345847B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In conventional gaming machines, based on the ball entering the starting hole, a win/fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. , there was one in which a jackpot game was executed in which a jackpot was opened. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that sets a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a high base state, after the end of a jackpot game (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a high base state that is set after the end of a jackpot game, will shift to another gaming state when the number of fluctuating displays of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times or when a jackpot occurs. It was said that it was possible to do so.

JP 10-57583

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to reduce the rate of decrease in the number of game balls in the player's possession, so the player can play with a sense of security until the next jackpot game. It can be carried out. On the other hand, if the next jackpot occurs immediately after an advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state will end immediately, and the player will not be able to fully play the game in the advantageous gaming state. There was a risk that interest in gaming would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's sense of security regarding the execution of advantageous gaming conditions and increase his or her interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
a first acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port, with a first number as an upper limit;
a second acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port, with a second number as an upper limit;
a first win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means;
a second win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot and a small hit determination for determining whether or not it is a small win based on the acquired information stored in the second acquired information storage means;
a first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first validity determination;
a second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second validity determination;
a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game when the result of the first judgment or the second judgment is a jackpot;
a small winning game execution means that executes a small winning game when the result of the second validity determination is a small winning;
Equipped with
A gaming machine capable of displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel in a variable manner,
As a game area, it has a first game area and a second game area,
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area, the second starting port is provided in the second gaming area,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state, a game based on the first judgment is executed by firing a game ball into the first gaming area;
When the gaming state is the second gaming state, a game mainly based on the second judgment is executed by firing a game ball into the second gaming area,
As the time of the fluctuation display of the first identification information that is executed when the result of the first validity determination is negative, a first failure fluctuation time and a second failure fluctuation time that is longer than the first failure fluctuation time are defined. have,
During the period from when the second gaming state is set until when the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is incorrect. In this case, selecting the first deviation variation time as the time for displaying the variation of the first identification information ,
A first specific fluctuation period, which is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first judgment, includes a first jackpot fluctuation time and a second jackpot fluctuation time longer than the first jackpot fluctuation time. 2. Has a jackpot fluctuation time,
If the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, making it impossible to perform a new first validity determination;
When the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the jackpot determination is made impossible and a second win/fail determination is executed in which the small hit determination is executed. ,
The second jackpot fluctuation time is a longer jackpot fluctuation time than the second loss fluctuation time,
During the period from when the second gaming state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is a jackpot. In this case, the second jackpot fluctuation time is selected as the time for the fluctuation display of the first identification information,
In a period after the second gaming state is set and after the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is a jackpot. In this case, the first jackpot fluctuation time is selected as the time for the fluctuation display of the first identification information.
It is characterized by this.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Moreover, the deviation fluctuation time of the first identification information when the result of the first validity determination is negative includes a first deviation fluctuation time of a relatively short time and a second deviation fluctuation time of a relatively long time. Then, during the period from when the second gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the first identification information fluctuation display is executed the first time, if the result of the first validity determination is incorrect, the corresponding A relatively short first deviation fluctuation time is selected as the first identification information fluctuation display time.

If you hit a jackpot in the first gaming state and move to the second gaming state with the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the shot is fired into the second gaming area and a second win/fail judgment is performed. Even though the main game is executed, the first validity determination is executed immediately after the transition to the second gaming state. Even in such a case, according to the configuration of the present invention, after the transition to the second gaming state, a short variation time is selected as the error variation time of the first identification information based on the first validity determination. , it becomes possible to digest the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means as quickly as possible. As a result, after the start of the second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming state may end is ended early by executing the first validity judgment, thereby giving a sense of security to subsequent games. becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that increases a player's sense of security regarding execution of an advantageous gaming state and increases his/her interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a back view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing displays included in the gaming machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big prize opening. It is a table showing various random numbers obtained by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a regular symbol variation table. This is a pattern selection table. It is a table showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting pitch entry. It is a flowchart of normal figure movement processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of normal electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game). It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing in Example 2. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 fluctuation processing in Example 2. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 fluctuation processing in Example 2. It is a flowchart of the game state setting process of Example 2.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In addition, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuating display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of executing a winning game that can award a predetermined amount of gaming profits (for example, prize balls) to the player. , an example to which the present invention is applied will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main frame 52 for mounting the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported at one end in the vertical direction (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed, respectively, relative to the outer frame 53 with the one end as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

In addition, the front frame 51 includes a firing handle 60 for firing the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a firing handle 60 that can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the firing device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. The front frame 51 also includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively called (also simply referred to as a "performance button 63") is provided. The plurality of performance buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game performance. Note that the configuration of the production button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and may be any type that can detect an input from a player, or an input detection means (for example, , a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs an input. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (a second image display device 71, a third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are arranged in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily viewed by the player. It is installed so as to protrude toward the outside and to be inclined outward. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution/non-execution of a game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game productions (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo productions, and game-related information (ball information obtained, number of rounds, number of consecutive wins, remaining period of game status, game mode, reliability and explanation of game productions, etc.) , information regarding the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information among these pieces of information, or may display the same information. In addition, when the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display different information among these pieces of information, there are cases where the same information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Also, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, and third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. may also be displayed. Note that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device."

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is being Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be able to rotate by a predetermined angle (approximately 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71, which is provided to protrude in front of the front frame 51, This configuration is to prevent damage caused by collision with the hall equipment (ball rental machines, inter-machine equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the gaming machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

The game board 2 has a game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4, into which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. The game board 2 is also provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are provided in the game area 3 in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, making it possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the firing device side.

Further, near the center of the gaming area 3, an image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided. Note that the image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "performance pattern display area") in which performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "performance patterns") are displayed side by side in the left and right direction. ), and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set according to the game state (low-accuracy low base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state). A variable display is performed in synchronization with a variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) that is set as the main character of the game. In addition, the production pattern 8L is also referred to as the "left symbol," the production symbol 8C is also referred to as the "middle symbol," and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as the "right symbol."

The display mode of the performance symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A to be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-accuracy, low-base state, the second starting port 21, which is a variable starting port into which game balls fired into the right gaming area 3B can enter, is in a high-base state where the frequency of game balls entering is high. (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), and the probability of correctness judgment of special symbols (first special symbol correctness judgment and second special symbol correctness judgment) is low probability (“ (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to be longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (missing). All fluctuations are 10 minutes).

In addition, the third starting port 26, which is a fixed starting port into which a game ball fired into the right gaming area 3B can enter, has a ball entry frequency that does not change depending on whether the ball is in a low base state or a high base state, but it is connected to the left gaming area 3A. The frequency of ball entry (possibility of ball entry) is set lower than that of the first starting port 20, which is a fixed starting port into which a fired game ball can enter.

Therefore, in the normal state (low accuracy low base state), a game ball is fired into the right game area 3B (second game area), and the ball enters the second starting port 21 or/and the third starting port 26, and the ball enters the second starting port 21 or/and the third starting port 26. Rather than displaying the special symbols in a variable manner (second special symbol validity determination), a game ball is fired into the left gaming area 3A (first gaming area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to vary the first special symbol. It is said that it is more advantageous for the player to play the displayed game (first special symbol validity determination). That is, the normal state can be said to be a gaming state in which the first special symbol (performance symbol) is the main character and is displayed variably (the first special symbol validity determination is mainly performed). Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are designed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

In addition, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the performance symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a ("first The results of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") The results of symbol variation display (results of special symbol propriety determination) are displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize them. Incidentally, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information." Further, the special symbol validity determination is also simply referred to as "validity determination" or "first validity determination." Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol validity determination is also referred to as "validity determination execution means" or "first validity determination execution means."

For example, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot (first specific hit), the performance symbol will be stopped and displayed at a symbol with the same three digits such as "777" (double number) (also known as a "jackpot symbol"). say). In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific win), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special small-hit symbol such as "3★3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") will be used. Stop displaying the symbol. In addition, when a small hit occurs, instead of stopping and displaying the small winning symbol, the small winning symbol and the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed in the same manner. In addition, when there are multiple small wins (first small win, second small win, etc.), different small win patterns (first small win pattern, second small win pattern, etc.) can be used to distinguish them. ) may be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small winning symbols may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish between them.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a failure, the performance symbol will be stopped and displayed with a variation pattern in which at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different ("The failure symbol ). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (results of the special symbol validity determination) by looking at the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed. In other words, the player generally does not directly understand the result of the special symbol validity determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather The user sees and understands the performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, examples of the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner include a manner in which they are scrolled vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc., a manner in which the performance symbols are displayed using only the first performance symbol display section 7b, and a manner in which the performance symbols are displayed using only the first performance symbol display section 7b. In addition, it has an aspect in which effects are displayed using one or both of the second effect pattern display section 71a and the third effect pattern display section 72a. Additionally, in addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display section 71a or the third effect symbol display section 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game performance using the above-mentioned performance symbols (performance symbol game performance), a game performance that is executed along with a winning game (a jackpot game, a small winning game) is displayed. A winning game performance (a jackpot game performance, a small winning game performance), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. are displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol game performance, winning game performance, and demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, although the details will be described later, there is also a gaming state (state A, state B, or state C), a state in which a game is played by firing a game ball into the left gaming area 3A, or a state in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into the right gaming area 3B. The display mode on the performance symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine that can variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (at the same time), and is suitable for this type of game. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first performance reservation display area 9c (first performance reservation display section) that displays a first performance reservation 9a according to the number of stored first special symbol reservations, which will be described later. There is a second performance hold display area 9d (second performance hold display section) that displays a second performance hold 9b according to the number of second special figure hold memories, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first performance hold 9a or the second performance hold 9b in the performance hold display area, the first special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later. It is possible to clearly show to the player the stored number of stored special symbols and the stored number of second special symbols pending displayed on the second special symbol pending display 43b. Note that the display position of the first performance pending display section and the display position of the second performance pending display section may change depending on the gaming state, the gaming mode, or the game performance to be executed (such as a reach performance). Also, only one of the first performance suspension display section and the second performance suspension display section (for example, only the performance suspension display section corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center decoration 10 is provided so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decoration body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage part 11 can enter the first starting port 20, which will be described later, with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage part 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an illumination member (board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on depending on the game state, and which is shaped like letters, figures, etc., is arranged. There is.

Further, at the upper part of the center decoration body 10 and behind the decoration member 13, there is provided a movable decoration member 14 that can be operated in accordance with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, when a game performance with a relatively high probability of winning is executed, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (a predetermined The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. This increases the player's interest in the game and increases his or her expectations for winning.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 is provided which includes a non-variable first starting port 20 that does not change the ease with which game balls enter the game ball. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining the validity of the special symbol, etc. is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol ( As the first special symbol validity determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, there is a gate 28 (regular figure starting opening, passing opening, ball entrance opening, specific starting opening) through which game balls can pass (balls can enter). (also called a mouth) is provided. A game ball that enters from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the gaming area 3 in the downstream direction. Note that this gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a winning gate or an operation gate) for starting a jackpot game. In other words, this gate is both the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number etc. for determining the validity of the normal symbol is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variable condition) is met, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. As the symbol validity determination (also referred to as "second validity determination") is executed, the normal symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol validity determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21, which is a variable starting port, becomes open. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol validity determination of whether or not to operate the movable member 23 (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 is referred to as the “validity determination execution means”. It is also referred to as "second validity determination execution means." Note that this gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting the jackpot game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and also the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, although the details will be described later, when passing through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the function as the starting gate 29 is demonstrated only when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied (jackpot execution (Also referred to as a possible state or a jackpot waiting state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, control processing regarding the normal symbols is performed and jackpot starting processing is not executed. In addition, if the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is met (in the jackpot waiting state), the waiting jackpot game starts and the predetermined jackpot prize opening ( A round game in which the first big prize opening 30) is opened (ball entry possible state) starts.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first prize opening 30 is provided. A grand prize winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate) upper surface as a game ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right in the drawing). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning opening 30. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 is retracted toward the back side of the game board 3, so that the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 forming the game ball passage disappears. Thereby, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance part of the first big winning opening 30 will enter the first big winning opening 30. In this way, the opening/closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (opened), it smoothly moves the game balls flowing down to the first big prize. In addition to letting the ball enter the prize opening 30, when the game ball is in the closed state (closed), the game ball that has flowed down can be directed in any direction (the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 21, etc., which will be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible to guide the player to the second major prize opening 35, etc.). Incidentally, a game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entry opening) is configured to switch between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to change to a ballable state (open state).

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a non-stick ball that does not change the ease of entry of game balls. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number etc. for special symbol validity determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the validity determination regarding the second special symbol ( As the second special symbol (validity determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first big prize opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), and the upper game ball passage where the third starting opening 26 is provided, and the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 A lower game ball passageway in which two major prize openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26, etc. Otherwise, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device that allows balls to enter at any time, if you hit the jackpot in a left-handed game (so-called first hit) and execute the first jackpot game in a right-handed game. During the jackpot game, the game ball is allowed to enter (hold) the third starting port 26, and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner immediately after the jackpot game ends.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a variable variable that changes the ease with which the game ball enters. A variable prize winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port" or "variable starting port") is provided with a second starting port 21 of the formula. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number etc. for determining the validity of the special symbol is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the second special symbol (the 2 special symbol validity determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an "opening/closing member"), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23. Through this opening/closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which there is a higher possibility of a game ball entering than the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, a game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, like the opening/closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. Flows downstream of the gaming area.

Furthermore, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance portion of the second starting port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), it can prevent the game balls flowing down. The ball enters the second starting port 21 smoothly, and when the ball is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is moved in any direction (second prize winning port 35 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to.

In addition, in the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) of the second starting opening 21, there is a second winning opening 35 provided with a second big winning opening 35. A grand prize winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member 37, and the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed by the operation of the opening/closing member 37. Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 and closes the opening/closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

Further, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second grand prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 is retracted toward the back of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening/closing member 37 that was previously used is no longer present at the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second big winning opening 35 enters the second big winning opening 35. In this way, the opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), the game ball flowing down can be opened and closed. Smoothly enters the ball into the second grand prize opening 35, and when in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out port 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. Incidentally, a game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entry opening) operates between an entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. It is possible to change to a ballable state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) of general ball entry holes 27 are provided in the gaming area below the left side area (left gaming area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the gaming area 3. The gaming area 3 where various ball entrances etc. are arranged in this way is divided into a left gaming area (first gaming area) 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area (second gaming area) 3B on the right side. , can be divided into A batting style in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left-handed hitting, and a batting style in which the gaming ball is launched in such a way that it flows down in the right gaming area 3B is called right-handed batting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to hit the ball to the left into the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game in which the ball enters the first starting port 20 by left-handed batting (first special symbol validity determination).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 (first special symbol judgment), the jackpot game and after the end of the jackpot game (special game) (low probability high base state, high probability High base state or high accuracy low base state) is when the ball enters the gate 28, the first big winning hole 30, the second starting hole 21, the third starting hole 26, or the second big winning hole 35 when hitting the ball to the right. It is a game that aims at That is, in the jackpot game, the low-accuracy high base state (state B), the high-accuracy high base state (state B), or the high-accuracy low base state (state C), the second starting port 21 and/or the 3. It is a right-handed game mainly based on the ball entering the starting hole 26 (determination of whether the second special symbol is correct or not). When a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, second starting hole 21, third starting hole 26, first big winning hole 30, second big winning hole 35, and general ball entrance 27, A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" or "gaming profits") are paid out (granted) at each ball entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of gaming profit) paid out based on balls entering the first big winning hole 30 is calculated from the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set higher than the number of pieces (amount of gaming profits). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for each ball that enters, and the second grand prize hole 35 pays out 10 prize balls for each ball that enters. The prize ball shall be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that displays a first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays a second special symbol in a variable manner and stops. It includes a device 41b (second special symbol display section) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display section) that displays normal symbols (also referred to as "specific identification information") in a variable and static manner. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the stored number of validity determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, and a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of memory determination information (first special symbol reservation) regarding the first special symbol; It includes a second special pattern holding display 43b that displays the number of memorized numbers of 2 special pattern holdings), and a normal pattern holding display 44 that displays the number of memory holdings of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42. ing.

The main display 40 also includes a hit indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination is a hit; When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 that shows the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 that shows that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and a direction in which the game ball is launched, that is, a right-handed hit. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be fired to the left or the left. The various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control section, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26. In addition, in the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display section 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure holding display section 43.

In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the first starting port 20 and the second starting port are displayed by the special symbol (stop pattern) that is stopped (derived display). 21 or the result of the validity judgment (special symbol validity judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol appropriateness determination. If the stopping symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol), the first symbol is released in an opening pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed. A special game (a jackpot game, a small win game) in which the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is the first jackpot (4R first jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Furthermore, when a second jackpot (4R second jackpot) is achieved, four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Furthermore, in the event of a failure, two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. As for the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined depending on the result of the second special symbol validity determination (big hit, small hit, miss). In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, but the manner of the variable display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED may be turned on so that the light repeatedly flows therethrough.

Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and performance symbols (display results of variable displays), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as the "win mode". ”, “specific mode”, “specific display mode”, or “specific display result”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of special symbol validity judgment is a failure is referred to as “missing mode”, “non-specific mode” , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result." In addition, the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot is also referred to as the "jackpot mode", and the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a small hit is also referred to as the "small hit mode". Also referred to as "hit mode". Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section), and the special symbol display section 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means."

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or third starting port 26, various kinds of random numbers for determining the validity of special symbols etc. are generated based on the entering of the ball. Information (also referred to as "acquisition information") is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 85 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 85a as a first special symbol reservation (also referred to as "first acquired information"); If the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special pattern holding storage unit 85b as a second special pattern holding (also referred to as "second acquired information"). be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage section 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and collectively as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special symbol reservation stored in the special symbol reservation storage section 85 is consumed when the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the special symbol reservation. Extinguishing the special symbol reservation means determining the special symbol propriety judgment random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation, and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or third starting port 26 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entering. That is, during execution of variable display of each special symbol or execution of a special game based on any special symbol validity determination, the special symbol validity determination for the entered ball is limited to a predetermined number (4 for each). It is now possible to reserve (reserve) the rights to.

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special figures reserved, the first special figure reservation display 43a This displays the number of pending items. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of ``u□v●'', the display mode can be such that the LED for u is turned off and the LED for v is turned on in red. Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 2, the display mode may be such that the LED for u is lit in red and the LED for v is turned off, such as "u●v□". Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Further, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as a display mode such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of two LEDs "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figures holding, the second special figure holding display 43b It displays numbers. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of reservations is 1 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbols is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detected by the gate sensor 28a). The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops displaying them, and uses the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stopped symbols) to indicate the result of the normal symbol validity determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol validity determination. If the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game ("specific game") in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. ) is carried out. Further, the means (main control section) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination depending on the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, if the determination result is a failure, a normal failure symbol such as "s□t■" in which only the t LED is lit is displayed. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately turn on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, this pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining the validity of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball, and acquires various kinds of acquired information. is temporarily stored as a general pattern reservation in the general pattern reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of ordinary figures that can be stored in the ordinary figures reservation storage section 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage section 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the random number for normal symbol propriety determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the fluctuating display of the regular symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. can reserve (reserve) the right to judge the validity of normal symbols for the passage of a predetermined number of symbols.

This number of ordinary drawings on hold is displayed on the ordinary drawings holding display 44. Specifically, the common picture reservation display 44 is composed of two LEDs "qr", and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting the LEDs according to the number of common pictures pending. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of "q□r●", the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red. Further, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (a "main control section" or "main control section") that controls gaming profits such as special symbol validity determination, normal symbol validity determination, and gaming state transition. (also referred to as "gaming control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "performance control unit") that controls the production executed as the game progresses, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a "payout control unit") that performs control regarding payouts, the effect symbols 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the symbols displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect pending display 103b, etc. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided approximately at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case is provided that stores the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for storing a power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 81 is mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special pattern holding storage section 85 (first special drawing holding storage section 85a and second special drawing holding storage section 85b) and regular drawing holding storage section 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a third starting port sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first big winning port sensor 30a, and a second starting port sensor 20a. A big prize opening sensor 35a and a general ball entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided within the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The third starting port sensor 26a is provided within the third starting port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third starting port 26. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

Further, as the solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first big winning port solenoid 33, and a second big winning port solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol display 42. A figure holding display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a winning display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by a game control microcomputer 81 (main control section 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a launch device 112 is connected to the payout control board 110 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). is connected. Firing device 112 includes firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. This system enables ball lending based on information stored in a value storage medium, etc.

The payout control board 110 has a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a "payout control microcomputer") that controls the payout of game balls of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. It is driven to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls that are paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. Note that when the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 changes to the position of the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“performance control microcomputer”) that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the game production as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 consists of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the and stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of special symbol validity judgment) is shown by lighting/extinguishing or color of the corresponding LED. Stop and display. Similarly, the third effect pending display 103a and the fourth effect pending display 103b each include two LEDs. Then, depending on the lighting/extinguishing of the two LEDs or the combination of colors, the third performance reservation display 103a displays the number of reservations displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c and the first special symbol reservation display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that shows the same number of pending items as the number of pending items. In addition, the fourth effect holding display 103b is controlled to display the same number of holding pieces as the number of holding pieces displayed in the second effect holding display area 9d and the number of holding pieces displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b. Ru.

The character design can be displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (performance pattern display section), or the movable decorative member 14 can be moved in front of the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section) to display the character pattern on the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section). By covering part or almost the entire part of the part), part or all of the effect pattern 8, the first effect pending display part 9c, or the second effect pending display part 9d may become invisible. be. Even in such a covered state, in order to be able to reliably check the fluctuating display and stop display of the performance symbols, the number of pending items, etc., these performance display devices 102, the third performance reservation display device 103a, And, a fourth effect pending display 103b is provided. The display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b is such that the display is always visible without being obstructed by the movement of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Furthermore, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 also generates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, lighting color, etc.) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 based on commands received from the main control board 80. , also referred to as lamp data) from data stored in the ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107.

Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "drive data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and The motion of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the motion pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 includes a first performance button detection switch 63c and a first performance button detection switch 63c that detects that the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 production button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when a player performs a predetermined input operation on the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b, a signal is outputted to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding performance button detection switch.

Next, control related to special symbol validity determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The results of special symbol validity judgment include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In addition, when there is a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. Moreover, when it is a "miss", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. When a jackpot or small win is determined, a "special game" is executed in which the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game that is executed as a jackpot is called a "jackpot game," and a special game that is executed as a small win is called a "small win game."

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specific result) of special symbol validity determination, the winning type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed. In other words, depending on whether the result of the special symbol validity judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the second specific result, or another specific result, different hit types (jackpot , including small winnings). In addition, the special games to be executed may differ depending on the winning type, and the amount of gaming profits that can be earned by the special games may differ, and the gaming state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of winnings include "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "2R 2nd jackpot". 5 jackpot," "2R 6th jackpot," "2R 7th jackpot," and "2R 8th jackpot." In the "15R third jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 15 times. In addition, for "4R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 4 times. "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" are the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (1st big winning hole 30). Twice. In this way, in all jackpots, the first big prize opening 30 is opened and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning hole 30 is also referred to as a "big winning hole for jackpot (variable ball entry hole for jackpot)".

In addition, for "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be described later. to a high probability state (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)." This high probability state (variable probability function) continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, "4R 2nd jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a low probability state (described later) (the probability change function is not activated) . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also called "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, for "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time saving" which sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time function" and does not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability low base state (state C). This high probability low base state continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, the gameplay in the high accuracy low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as mentioned above, by playing the right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged, the second special This is a period in which it is possible to determine whether a symbol is correct or not, generate a small hit, and increase the number of game balls during the period between the previous jackpot and the next jackpot (during the jackpot). In addition, by causing small hits to occur frequently in this high-accuracy/low-base state between jackpots, it is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired in a short period of time due to the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, for the "4R second jackpot", "2R seventh jackpot", and "2R eighth jackpot", the "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the low probability high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the 100th execution of the variable display of the special symbol. . When the variable display of the special symbol ends after being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to a low probability low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R 7th jackpot", the low-probability-high base state ends when the next jackpot occurs or when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times. When the variable display of the special symbol ends after being executed 50 times, the gaming state is set to a low probability low base state (normal state). Also, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy, high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged as described above, the second special symbol validity determination is performed, and the next This is the period during which players play games in hopes of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, for the "2R 5th jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot", the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability high base state. In the case of "2R 5th jackpot", the "second special symbol time saving function" will continue until the next jackpot occurs, and the "high base generation function" will continue until the next jackpot occurs or the special symbol changes. Terminates based on the display being executed 50 times. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" continues until the next jackpot occurs. In other words, in the case of "2R 5th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, until the special symbol fluctuates 50 times, it will be in a high-accuracy, high-base state, and even after 50 times, a jackpot will not occur. , the gaming state is set to high probability low base state.

In the high-accuracy, high-base state, similarly to the low-accuracy, high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol validity judgment is performed, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next jackpot. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy/low-base state is an advantageous period for players who can expect to win a large number of game balls in a short period of time by making frequent small hits through right-handed games. be. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be obtained in the high-accuracy, low-base state than in the high-accuracy, high-base state. Therefore, if a jackpot does not occur until the number of variable displays of special symbols after the jackpot game ends is 50 times, the gaming state changes to a more advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) than before.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, the "2R 6th jackpot" will be in a high-accuracy, high-base state until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, and if the jackpot does not occur even after 100 times, This is the same as the "2R 5th jackpot" except that the gaming state is set to a high probability low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Furthermore, the timing at which the gaming state changes from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state is set earlier for the "2R 5th jackpot" than for the "2R 6th jackpot". Therefore, it can be said that the "2R 5th jackpot" is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the "2R 6th jackpot".

In addition, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 5th jackpot game) related to "2R 5th jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" By executing a common game performance (first game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, reach performance, etc.) in the sure-high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he is in. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-reporting states in which the gaming state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is made difficult).

If the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", after the special symbol has been displayed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a high probability low base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) and "2R 7th jackpot", after the special symbol has been displayed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a low-probability, low-base state (normal state that is disadvantageous for the player). Regardless of which gaming state the player is in, he or she plays the game in anticipation of shifting to the high-accuracy, low-base state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 8th jackpot game) related to "2R 8th jackpot" By executing a common game performance (second game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, reach performance, etc.) in the sure-high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he is in. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-reporting states in which the gaming state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is made difficult).

If the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", after the special symbol has been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a high probability low base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) and "2R 8th jackpot", after the special symbol has been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low-probability, low-base state (normal state that is disadvantageous for the player). Regardless of which gaming state the player is in, he or she will play the game in anticipation of transitioning to the high-accuracy, low-base state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 5th jackpot game) related to "2R 5th jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" The high probability base state, the high probability base state after the end of the jackpot game related to “2R 6th jackpot” (2R 6th jackpot game), and the jackpot game related to “2R 8th jackpot” (2R 8th jackpot game) By executing a common game performance (second game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, reach performance, etc.) in the low-accuracy/high-base state after the end, the player can recognize which game state he/she is in. make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. Thereby, these gaming states are made into non-reporting states in which the gaming states (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) are not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", after the special symbol has been displayed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a high probability low base state (advantageous state advantageous to the player) and "2R In the case of "7th jackpot", the gaming state changes to a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbols have been displayed 50 times. In addition, if the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", after the special symbol has been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a high-probability-low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player). In the case of "2R 8th jackpot", after the special symbols have been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player plays the game with the expectation that the state will shift to the high-accuracy, low-base state when the special symbol is displayed 50 times, no matter which gaming state the player is in. , it will increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if it does not shift to a high-probability low-base state, players can play with the expectation that at least the high-base state will continue (that is, the non-notification state will continue) without shifting to a low-probability low-base state. I do. If the non-announcement state continues after the special symbol has been displayed 50 times, expect a jackpot, and when the special symbol has been displayed 100 times, it will shift to a high-accuracy, low-base state. This increases the player's interest in the game by playing the game in anticipation of what will happen. In this way, in the non-notification state, points are set multiple times to increase the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to further increase the player's interest in the game and maintain a high level of interest in the game for a long period of time.

In addition, for small wins that may occur as a result of the second special symbol validity determination, the number of openings of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is 6 times, and compared to other jackpots, the number of times the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is opened is 1 (and (total) opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed six times for 0.3 seconds, for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, compared to jackpot games (for example, 15R 3rd jackpot game, 4R 4th jackpot game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small win game is set to be smaller. However, by generating small wins a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small winning games and obtain more game balls. In addition, in the case of a small win, the second big prize opening 35 is all opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large prize opening 35 is also referred to as a "small winning large winning opening (small winning variable ball entrance)". In addition, in the small winning game (small winning game), unlike the big winning (big winning game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of openings. In addition, the probability variable function will not be activated based on the occurrence of a small hit, and if the gaming state when a small hit occurs is a high probability state, it will remain in a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs, If the game state is a low probability state, it will remain a low probability state even after the small winning game ends. Similarly, the time saving function and high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of a small hit.

In addition, the allocation probability to each jackpot in the determination of the validity of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 65% for the 4R first jackpot and 35% for the 4R second jackpot. On the other hand, the jackpot in the judgment of the second special symbol (special pattern 2) is 50% for the 15R 3rd jackpot, 5% for the 4R 4th jackpot, 5% for the 2R 5th jackpot, and 5% for the 2R 6th jackpot. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot 25%, 2R 8th jackpot 10%. That is, due to the operation of the second special symbol time-saving function described later, a jackpot is achieved by the correctness judgment (second special symbol correctness judgment) based on the ball entering the second starting hole 21 or the third starting hole 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved. In this case, it becomes a 15R jackpot (15R third jackpot), and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In this way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than hitting the jackpot in the winning/failure judgment (first special symbol correctness judgment) made when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20, the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 or 3. It is more likely that it will be advantageous for the player (to obtain a large amount of game balls) if the game ball enters the starting hole 26 and the game ball hits the jackpot in the judgment (second special symbol judgment). It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R third jackpot and the occurrence of a high-precision low-base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol validity determination (also referred to as "properness determination information")", and when a jackpot is achieved, The determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the "random number for jackpot type determination (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" or "information for symbol determination")". As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol takes a value in the range from 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range from 0 to 99. In addition, the random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining the validity of a special symbol and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern information")." Further, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including a variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes values in the range from 0 to 198. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include the random numbers for normal symbol validity determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol validity determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 (normal symbol validity determination). Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has the following functions: a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and normal symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and normal symbols, and a function to extend the opening of the second starting port. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of states. Regarding the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a state in which the probability variation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and a state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (jackpot probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination is higher than in the low probability state (jackpot probability: 1/63). In other words, in a low probability state, a jackpot determination table for a low probability state is used to determine whether the jackpot is determined, but in a high probability state, a jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table for a high probability state in which there are many values of random numbers for determining the special symbols that are determined to be a jackpot. Judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability that the result of the special symbol variation display will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will become a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated. Note that the means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability (jackpot probability) for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, the state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbols (time from the start of variable display to the time of final display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbols in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special symbols are consumed becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting slot (balls that can be stored as reserved special symbols) is more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, it is set as a "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, in state A shown in FIG. 9, the player plays a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26. When this is done, the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes for a miss, 3 minutes for a jackpot, and 2 minutes for a small win), the game cannot proceed smoothly (in such a state (also called the "first condition state"). Therefore, even if the player plays a right-handed game in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in state A, the game is played with a left-handed game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the special symbol variation time is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (in parallel) execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner in state A, the player can enter the game ball into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , it is possible to display the first special symbol in a variable manner.

When the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in state B or state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also referred to as "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 2. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbols is short, the player can play right-handed games without reducing the number of balls he has compared to left-handed games (in state B, the number of balls is maintained or slightly decreased, and in state C ), it becomes possible to smoothly execute the game (determination of the validity of the second special symbol, variable game of the second special symbol). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time-saving function is also activated during the period in which the second special symbol time-saving function is activated, but the first special symbol time-saving function may not be activated.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the normal symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function operate when the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and when the gaming state is low base state (low probability low base state, high probability does not operate in low base conditions). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol validity determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the "normal symbol high probability state"). In other words, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is higher than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol correctness determination (normal symbol determination) is performed (see FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. In other words, the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the low base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and then opens. During the period of operation, the second starting port is in an open state. In addition, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the high base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs one opening operation for 6.0 seconds (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing member 37 is opened is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of times the opening and closing member 37 is opened may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be one opening of 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be three openings of 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times for 1.0 seconds, which may be greater than the number of openings in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable prize winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , the period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the frequency of execution of the second special symbol validity determination increases. As mentioned above, in a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

Further, if the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of openings, the lower the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting port 21. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short (1 second). In addition, since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state while the normal symbols are changing, the normal symbol changing time is the time when the game ball begins to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 becomes an open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 which is in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the materials are different).

Thereby, the speed of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the speed of the game torrent in the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made gentler, or an inhibiting member (such as a protrusion) that reduces the flow rate may be provided. Also, in this way, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and can be moved to the second grand prize opening. This further reduces the possibility that the ball will fall (enter the ball) into the 35. In other words, in the high base state, even if there is a small hit and the second big prize opening 35 is in the open state (ball entry possible state), the game ball that has flown down will enter the second starting opening 21 and enter the second It is difficult to enter the ball into the grand prize opening 35.

The high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, due to the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second starting port is more open than when the function is not activated. It is sufficient that the number 21 is easily released (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function."

As mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the determination of the validity of the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player than the determination of the validity of the first special symbol, the player There is a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility that the player attempts to play a right-handed game. However, as mentioned above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, resulting in very poor gaming efficiency. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner in a left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner in a right-handed game. Here, the "state where the first special symbol is not being played (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0". ”. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "0". It means that.

In addition, in high base states such as high-accuracy high-base state and low-accuracy high-base state, as well as in high-accuracy low base states, the second special symbol time-saving function shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, making it possible to play right-handed games. Improves gaming efficiency. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously by playing a right-handed game and determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether the symbol is correct or not, the player performs a right hit to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of balls entering the second starting hole 21 or the third starting hole 26 when playing a right-handed game is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state). However, since the variation time of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is shorter than that in the normal state, it is shorter than the first special symbol validity determination. It is set to be more advantageous for the player to play a right-handed game in which the second special symbol validity determination that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are not operating, so the entry to the second starting port 21 is not activated. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is less likely to be obtained in a higher base state. However, instead of this, the second special symbol correctness judgment prevents the game ball from decreasing during the jackpot due to the small win game that occurs with a high probability (small win probability: 300/630), and rather makes the small win occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by causing this to occur (by causing it to occur multiple times in a short period of time).

In other words, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by making the ball enter the second starting hole 21 frequently by playing the right-handed game, you can reach the second starting position without significantly reducing the number of balls you have. 2 Aim for the next jackpot by judging the validity of the special symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, the game ball will not be awarded. The number of balls does not increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, the setting is such that about 90 to 95% of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, so unless the ball enters the other ball entry port, If the condition continues for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, small hits are generated at high frequency by the second special symbol correctness judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game. In addition to trying to increase the number of balls held in the game, the player aims to generate the next jackpot by determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the high probability low base state, the longer the period in which the next jackpot does not occur (the longer the period in the high probability low base state continues), the more small wins are generated. It is advantageous for the player because there are more chances to play the small winning game and it becomes possible to gradually increase the number of balls held by playing the small winning game.

[Explanation of board configuration and gaming status]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various ball entry holes are arranged from the upstream side of the game area, including a gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first big winning hole 30, and a first big winning hole 30. The third starting port 26, the second starting port 21, and the second big winning port 35 are arranged in the optimal order. In addition, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. The above) passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30, and then flows into the upper game ball passage (approximately 30%) and the lower game ball passage (about 30%). approximately 70%).

The game balls sorted to the lower game ball path flow down the top surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, then flow down the top surface of the opening/closing member 37 of the second winning port 35, and flow down to the out port 34. It is said to be composed of If there is an open winning hole (ball entrance) in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning hole, is ejected from the winning hole to the back of the game board, and the entered game ball is The structure is such that it does not flow into the downstream gaming area. The game balls sorted to the upper game ball passage either enter the third starting port 26, or flow further downstream toward the out port 34 without entering the third starting port 26.

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the gate 28 due to the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) due to the normal symbol reservation becoming "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream side of the right game area, almost all game balls hit to the right can pass through the gate 28, regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning holes.

When playing a right-handed game in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not the second starting port 21 should be opened. be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) that is almost a hit, so the game ball is at the gate. Immediately after passing (one second), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 becomes open. That is, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol validity determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21, 2. The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game continues, the second starting port 21 will be closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, and repeat the cycle (1 second closed → 6 .0 seconds open → 1 second closed → approximately 6.0 seconds open →...).

Therefore, when playing a right-handed game in a high base state, the second starting port 21 becomes almost open, and among the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B, the game balls distributed to the lower game ball path, Most of the balls (more than 95%) enter the second starting port 21. That is, even if a small winning game occurs in a high base state, the game balls distributed to the lower game ball path hardly ever enter the second big prize opening 35. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, a second special symbol validity determination is executed. In the second special symbol validity determination, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, there is a probability of 1/63 of a jackpot, a probability of 30/63 for a small hit, and a probability of 32/63 for a miss.

First, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is negative, the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B will pass through the gate 28, and many of the game balls will enter the second starting port 21, which will be in the open state. Entering the ball, the other game balls flow down from the game ball path that branches before the second starting port 21 to the upper game ball path, and enter the third starting port 26 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Either the ball is pitched or it flows into the out port 34. As a result, the second special symbol validity determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected when one ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol validity judgment is executed without reducing the number of balls, and the player aims for the next jackpot. becomes possible. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is ejected.

Next, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, the first big prize opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 will be opened in a manner according to the jackpot type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the jackpot game. As a result, when a jackpot game starts, the game ball that flows down due to the right-handed game is not prevented from entering the ball by other winning holes such as the second starting hole 21, and smoothly enters the first big winning hole. Enter the pitch at 30. Here, if the second starting port 21 is placed upstream of the first big prize winning port 30, it will shift to the low base state during the jackpot game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 will be activated even in the low base state. Since it is designed to be in the open state with a predetermined probability, the game ball flowing down the right gaming area during the jackpot game will enter the second starting port 21 first, and the ball will enter the second starting port 21. A situation arises in which only the game ball that was not present enters the second grand prize opening 30.

Furthermore, since the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is unnecessarily prolonged, and there is no benefit to the player. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the game becomes redundant, does not proceed smoothly, and reduces the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first jackpot opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the jackpot game can proceed smoothly. Become. In addition, since the first jackpot 30 is not opened except during jackpot games, the first jackpot 30 may obstruct the ball from entering the second starting slot 21 when the jackpot is not playing. do not have.

Next, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened and closed in the opening/closing mode for a small winning as shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, an opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the period. Therefore, approximately 99% (almost all) of the game balls that flow down to the second starting port 21 enter the second starting port 21 located upstream of the second big winning port 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even if a small win occurs and a small win game is executed in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened, the second starting opening 21 on the upstream side will cause the second big prize on the downstream side to be played. The entry of the ball into the opening 35 is obstructed, making it difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 35. Although the number is small (although the possibility is low), even in the high base state, a game ball that passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state. When reaching the second grand prize opening 35, if the second grand prize opening 35 is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second major prize opening 35.

Next, the high-certain low base state will be explained. The high probability low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is played in the high-accuracy-low base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination (normal symbol validity determination) is performed as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is about half that of the high base state ( 120/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. becomes. Since the probability of winning is about 1/2, there will be approximately a 50/50 chance of winning and losing.

That is, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and normal symbol validity determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, after the game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21, the second The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to three times of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), so as long as the right-handed game continues, the second starting port 21 will be opened three times for 0.9 seconds. , it is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and if it becomes a hit, it will be opened three times for 0.9 seconds after that, and if it becomes a miss, the normal symbol fluctuation time will be again for 3 seconds. Taking an example in which hits and misses occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens three times for 0.9 seconds, and the normal symbol changes for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, comes off, and closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and the cycle repeats (3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately Open for 2.7 seconds → Close for 3 seconds → Close for 3 seconds → Open for about 2.7 seconds →...).

Therefore, if you play a right-handed game in a high-accuracy, low-base state, the second starting port 21 will be in the open state about 30% of the time, and the second starting port 21 will be in the closed state about 70% of the time. . Therefore, in the high-accuracy low base state, compared to the high base state that occurs when the period in which the second starting port 21 is in the open state is about 90% and the period in which it is in the closed state is about 10%, the low base game The game balls that have been sorted into the ball path and flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 without entering the second starting port 21. It is set to have a high possibility of In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol validity judgment will be a small hit does not change whether it is in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or high accuracy low base state. do not have. That is, the small winning probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small winning probability: 300/630). Also, the result of the first special symbol validity determination executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol validity determination executed in the right-handed game has a small hit. ing.

As mentioned above, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, about 70% of the game balls that flow down the right game area (flow down to the second starting port 21) are distributed to the lower game ball path. The ball flows down (reaches) to the second big prize opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21. As a result, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 opens in the opening/closing manner for a small winning as shown in FIG. state. Specifically, an opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds, total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, If the ball enters the second starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the second big winning port 35, thereby playing a small winning game. The ball enters the second grand prize opening 35 which is in the open state.

Since the prize balls based on the ball entering the second big winning hole 35 are 10 prize balls for one ball entering, the ball is allowed to enter the second big winning hole 35 during a small winning game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during a high-accuracy, low-base state. In addition, the high-accuracy, low-base state continues at least until the next jackpot occurs due to the special symbol validity judgment (as long as the right-handed game continues, only the second special symbol validity judgment is executed), so the high-accuracy, low-base state The longer this continues, the more balls the player can hold. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain on average about 20 prize balls (2 balls entered) by the occurrence of one small winning game. By making this small winning game occur multiple times (many times) until the next jackpot occurs, it is possible to increase the amount of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 games). Moreover, as a result of this, the balls acquired in the small winning game can be added to the balls acquired in the jackpot game as the total acquired balls during the "consecutive game period" in which the right-handed game is continued, making it possible to acquire a larger amount of game balls. Moreover, this makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the second big prize opening 35 located downstream (the most downstream of these) of the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for the jackpot (exclusively for the jackpot), and the second starting opening 21 is for the small winning (only for the jackpot). It is said to be a big winning opening (only for small wins). In addition, by arranging the second big prize opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small winnings, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second big winning opening to be opened and closed. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the prize opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the high base state ( The probability that the game ball will enter the second grand prize opening 35 is higher in the high probability low base state than in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big prize opening 35 unless the ball passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), The effect of opening/closing control of the second starting port 21 is made more effective.

In addition, even in the same right-handed game, by entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, it is possible to keep the ball held almost (including a slight increase or decrease) (or hold it). A state (high base state) in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol validity determination will be a jackpot (advantageous jackpot) while suppressing the speed of ball reduction), and a state in which the second starting port 21 or the third When a game ball enters the starting hole 26 and a small hit occurs, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 35 to increase the number of balls, and the result of the second special symbol validity judgment becomes a jackpot (advantageous jackpot). There is a state in which players play with high expectations (high-accuracy, low-base state), and the gameplay is diversified. Moreover, this makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Furthermore, for the player, the high-accuracy, low-base state, which allows him to increase the number of balls he has, is a more advantageous gaming state than the high-accuracy, high-base state (high-accuracy, high-base state, low-accuracy, high-base state). .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after a jackpot game is set to a high probability high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high probability high base state. If the jackpot does not occur until the end of the display, the gaming state changes to a high probability low base state. In addition, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is a low-probability high-base state or a high-probability high-base state in the production symbol display section, etc. A game performance is executed in a display mode. As a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is not a high-probability low-base state but a high-base state, it will change to a high-probability low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It becomes possible to play games with anticipation. This also makes it possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the types of jackpots that transition from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state include "2R 5th jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot". "2R 5th jackpot" shifts from a high-precision high base state to a high-precision low base state after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays, and "2R 6th jackpot" changes 100 special symbols. After passing, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state. Furthermore, the high-probability and low-base states include "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot". "2R 7th jackpot" shifts from a low probability high base state to a low probability low base state (normal state) after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays, and "2R 8th jackpot" shifts from 100 special symbols to a low probability low base state (normal state). After the symbol fluctuation display passes, the state shifts from the low-accuracy high base state to the low-accuracy low base state (normal state). In this example, the jackpot games and the high after the jackpot games related to these four jackpot types, ``2R 5th jackpot'', ``2R 6th jackpot'', ``2R 7th jackpot'', and ``2R 8th jackpot'', are By executing a common performance in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he is in. That is, a non-notification state is set in which the gaming state is not notified.

In this example, the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" which will be in a non-notification state will be used 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after 100 times have elapsed, there is a higher possibility that the high base state will end after 100 times than when the high base state ends after 50 times. It is assumed that As a result, the player expects to transition to the high-probability low-base state after 50 plays, and if the high-base state continues without shifting to the high-probability low base state even after 50 plays ( Even if the non-reporting state continues), it is possible to further increase expectations for the high-accuracy/low-base state. This makes it possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

In addition, if you change to this mode and set the possibility of transitioning to the high-certain low base state to be the same whether you transition after 50 times or 100 times, Alternatively, the possibility of transitioning to the high-probability low base state may be made higher when the transition occurs after 50 times than when transition occurs after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, expectations for a high-certain transition to the low base state will be lowered. Furthermore, another jackpot type is provided, and if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays, after a second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of times ( If the jackpot does not occur by then, it may be determined to move to the high-certain low base state. On the other hand, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays, after the second predetermined number of times that is greater than the first predetermined number of times (if the jackpot has not been hit by then) (if not), it may be determined not to transition to the high certainty low base state. In addition, if a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is met during the non-notification state of the high base state, characters or letters that make it easy for the player to recognize the gaming state are displayed (execution of a confirmation effect). The status may be reported.

In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, if the result of the second special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot or if it is a miss, the result of the second special symbol validity determination in the high base state described above will be The same applies to the case of hitting the jackpot and the case of losing.

Furthermore, the start gate 29 is provided at the most upstream position in the right gaming area 3B by serving also as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at any timing without being obstructed from passing through the start gate 29 by the second starting port 21, etc., and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do so. The starting gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately, and in that case, the starting gate 29 may be located upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first variable prize opening 30 , the second starting port 21 and the second big winning port 35 need to be provided upstream.

Further, when a right-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the right game area. Furthermore, when a left-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (displayed) controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the left game area. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs "yz", and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the left gaming area as a display mode that turns off both LEDs, such as "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the right gaming area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the identification information (special symbols, production symbols) is displayed in a variable manner are "low-accuracy low base state", "high-accuracy low base state", " It is possible to control the game to either "low-accuracy, high-base state" or "high-accuracy, high-base state," of which the low-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state," and the high-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state." Also referred to as a "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 46. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main processing, initial settings are first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter settings. Perform a reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Further, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the ordinary design is referred to as "ordinary design", the special design is referred to as "special design", the first special design is referred to as "special design 1" or "first special design", and the second special design is referred to as "special design". 2" or "second special map."

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a period of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt processing (S105) ends and until the next interrupt processing (S105) starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing (S103) is repeated. executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained using FIG. 11. In the interrupt processing (S105), output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands and the like outputted here include information regarding the gaming state, the result of special symbol validity determination, symbols as jackpot types, fluctuation patterns, and the like. Note that the command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that is performed next to the output process (S201), various sensors attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, third starting port sensor 26a) are mainly used. , the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general ball entering hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. It also captures a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as "lower tray") is full and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. This is performed both during the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). This gives randomness to the obtained values of various random numbers.

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the starting port sensor detection process (S204), the starting ball entry process (S205), the regular symbol movement process (S206), and the special pattern 1 movement process (S207), which will be described later. ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power outage monitoring processing (S210) are executed. Thereafter, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is ended. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit). Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection process (S204) will be described using FIG. 12. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol reserved balls (the number of regular symbol reserved, specifically, the counter that counts the number of regular symbol reserved value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbols reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process advances to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols on hold is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of normal symbols on hold (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, normal symbol acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the regular symbol reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process advances to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls (the number of first special symbols reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80 It is determined whether or not the value of the counter provided in the RAM for counting the number of first special symbols reserved has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, in S306, if it is determined that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of reserved balls for special figure 1 (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is obtained. Processing is performed (S308) and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (label -TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area of the RAM (not shown), the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the random number value shown in FIG. 7(A)), and Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a or the third starting port sensor 26a. Determine (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of a counter provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 that counts the number of second special symbols on hold has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process ends. In S310, if it is determined that the number of special map 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of special map 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special map 2 related Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing ends.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol validity determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) (shown in Figure 7 (A) Random numbers), and these acquired random numbers are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special symbols 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the starting ball entering process (S205) will be described using FIG. 13. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether the number of special map 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process moves to S316. This is a case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special map 2 in S307 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting port or the third starting port. Applicable. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process moves to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the read random numbers, the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (random number value for special symbol validity determination) is determined to be a jackpot depending on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is further determined (preliminary judgment). This judgment (preliminary judgment) by S317 is a preliminary judgment (so-called ``holding advance reading'') that performs a validity judgment (judgment as to whether or not it is a jackpot) for the special drawing 2 hold prior to a judgment in the special drawing 2 holding judgment process that will be described later. ”).

In addition, the prior judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is based on the jackpot judgment table (see Figure 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot judgment table for a high probability state, and if it is a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value matches the jackpot determination value based on the normal state jackpot determination table. In addition, as other pre-judgment aspects, as a fluctuation pattern information determination table that can determine fluctuation pattern information, there is a fluctuation pattern information determination table for normal states (for low probability states) and a fluctuation pattern information determination table for high probability states (for high probability states). It is assumed that the variation pattern information determination table has the following. In the preliminary determination, predetermined fluctuation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (the value of a random number counter for special symbol validity determination, etc.) and the fluctuation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state. It is possible to do so. From this selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether a game performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, etc.

Next, in S318, game information (pre-determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining the validity of the special symbol matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variable pattern random number value), etc. is generated as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as the special figure 2 starting ball entry command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S316 may be sent as is to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number Instead of transmitting as is, game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special chart 2 start ball entry command sent from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is one. In addition to this, in this embodiment, by analyzing the special pattern 2 starting ball entry command, it is possible to determine whether or not the obtained special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot when judged in a high probability state, and It is possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot when judged based on the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as pending (production pending information), pre-determines the production pending information at a specific timing, and if it is determined to be correct or not in a low probability state. It becomes possible to determine whether performance suspension information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored.

In addition, from the perspective of fraud prevention, among the acquired random values read in S316, the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol is not sent as is to the sub-control unit, but the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type) Generate command data as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, including information indicating the random number value for type determination), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (the variation pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of preliminary determination. It is possible to set

Next, in S319, similarly to the process related to the above-mentioned special figure 2, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process moves to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls of special map 1 in S311 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is ended as is. The processing in S321 to S323 is similar to the processing in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read out (S321), A preliminary determination is performed on the read random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special chart 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Incidentally, the preliminary determination (pending pre-reading) in S322 is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process to be described later.

[General figure movement processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 following the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal pattern movement process (S206), the process regarding the normal pattern display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern movement status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, if the "common pattern movement status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal pattern standby process (S402) is performed, and if the "common pattern movement status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform the normal symbol fluctuation process (S404), and if the "common pattern movement status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal figure action status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. Note that the normal figure action status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be explained using FIG. 15. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), it is first determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol appropriateness determination process described below is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected. Further, following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the below-described normal symbol random number shift process is performed (S504), and then the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols.

[Normal symbol validity determination process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value (label -TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high probability normal pattern validity determination based on the value "0" to "238" (S604), and the process moves to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is a low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) is selected in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(C). It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on a low probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on a table (with a hit judgment value of "0" to "119") (S603), and the process moves to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern correctness determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal pattern hit) or not (S605). A normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (ordinary figure hit) in S605 (YES at S605), the winning ordinary symbol (ordinary figure per symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the ordinary figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of reserved balls in the normal symbol is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each common symbol reservation in the common symbol reservation storage unit is shifted one place from the current position to the side from which it is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-level pending memory in the common picture pending storage section, is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending common picture is cleared to 0 (S703 ), the process ends. In this way, the reservations for common maps are cleared in the order of reservation.

[Normal symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) will be explained using FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol validity determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal pattern confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be explained using FIG. 19. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the common map hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the status B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for status B (for high base status) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. As described above, the opening pattern for state B (high base state) is an opening pattern in which opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened is set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is for states A and C (low base state). Set the pattern (S906) and proceed to S904. The release pattern for state A and state C (low base state) is, as described above, an release pattern in which the release is performed three times for 0.9 seconds. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter. In S904, the normal drawing operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is finished.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be explained using FIG. 20. In the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure per end flag is ON (S1001). The common symbol winning end flag is a flag indicating that opening of the second starting port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game that has been executed as a winning result. If it is determined that the normal map hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003). If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control is executed to open the second starting port (S1004), and the process ends. In addition, if it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21, It is determined whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not the time to close the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), a process is performed to close the second starting port 21 (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process moves to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal pattern per end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and a normal pattern per end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in state B (high base state), and in state A. Also during state C (low base state), when the second starting port 21 is opened three times, it becomes "0". On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal pattern hit end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has been completed the number of times set in S903 or S906. , the end flag per common figure is turned OFF (S1011), the flag per common figure is turned OFF (S1012), the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special pattern 1 movement process (S207) following the normal pattern movement process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be explained using FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. Then, if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) is performed, and if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), performs special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), perform the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), and if the "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and if the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the processing is finished. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. In addition, since a small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 action processing, but a small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) will be explained using FIG. 22. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first starting port 20 (namely, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls) is "0" (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being played (S1207). Then, in S1207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is being played (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special map 2 is not being played (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a standby screen is in progress (demonstration screen for waiting for customers is being executed). (S1208), and if it is determined that the screen is on standby (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), a standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 validity judgment processing (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not being played" means that Special figure 2 is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls of Special figure 2 is "0". It means that. Of course, this means that the jackpot game and small win game related to special drawing 2 are not being executed.

[Special figure 1 validity judgment process]
Next, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be explained using FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 validity judgment process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation). The value (label -TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process moves to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is performing a variable display related to a jackpot, in determining whether or not the other special symbol is a jackpot, it is not judged whether or not it is a jackpot, but whether it is a small hit or a jackpot. It is considered either a miss (that is, it is not judged as a jackpot). In addition, since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, when the second special symbol is executing a variable display related to a jackpot, the result of the first special symbol validity determination executed during that time is: Everything will come off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special pattern 2 jackpot variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not display a variation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, i.e. It is determined whether the state is a high probability state (S1603). If it is determined in S1603 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) Judgment is made based on the table (the jackpot judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a judgment is made based on the jackpot judgment table for high probability state among the jackpot judgment tables (FIG. 8(A)) (S1605). In the jackpot judgment table for high probability states, the jackpot judgment values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In this S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the first special symbol is not in the execution of the fluctuation display related to the jackpot, the low probability correctness judgment (S1604) and the high probability judgment (S1604) and high probability judgment ( S1605) is also referred to as the first special figure 1 validity determination (first first validity determination). In addition, in S1602, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, the first special symbol is executing a fluctuation display related to a jackpot, the validity judgment (S1607) to be executed is changed to the second special symbol. Also referred to as FIG. 1 validity determination (second first validity determination). In the first special figure 1 correctness judgment (first first correctness judgment), a judgment process (jackpot judgment) to judge whether it is a jackpot or a miss is performed, and the second special figure 1 correctness judgment (second first correctness judgment) is performed. In the correct/incorrect judgment), a judgment process (determining) only the deviation is performed (deviation judgment).

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is a "jackpot" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for jackpot type determination (label -TRND- AS), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8(B) (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), FIG. 1 The jackpot fluctuation flag is turned on (S1610) and the process ends. In addition, in the case of judgment regarding the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the judgment regarding the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Further, when it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot, either the 4R first jackpot or the 4R second jackpot is executed. In addition, if the second special symbol (special pattern 2) is determined to be a jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, 2R 6th jackpot, 2R 7th jackpot, 2R One of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8(B)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "jackpot" (NO in S1606), the process moves to S1607. In S1607, a missed symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is a first jackpot variation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). and a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The corresponding flag is set in the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to a small hit (a fluctuation display in which the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed). The corresponding flag is set in the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation related to the jackpot is being displayed), the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed in the determination of the validity of the other special symbol. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols perform variable displays related to jackpots in parallel. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which too much gaming profit is given to a player in a very short period of time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling nature.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special symbol 1 validity determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is state A (whether it is a low probability low base state or not) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not (S1702), and if the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), refer to the state A jackpot table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state A and jackpot) and calculate the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). Note that once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected by the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), state A first reservation number out table (state A and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), and select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In addition, if it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number removal table (Fig. 9), a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high possibility that a fluctuation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of balls held is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

In addition, if it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then check whether the gaming state is in state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state). Determine (S1708). In S1708, if it is determined that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 9 that corresponds to state B and jackpot), and change based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In S1709, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B out-of-order table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state B and out-off). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Also, if it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is determined to be state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the status C jackpot table (see FIG. 9) is A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) by referring to the part of the variation pattern table shown that corresponds to state C and jackpot (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the table for state C loss (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state C and loss). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in state B and state C, since the game is played mainly by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol due to the right-handed game, if the game is played according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Variable display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol in state B and state C is made simple (the number of types is small and the variation time is also short). In state B, if it is a jackpot, the variation pattern P15 is used, and if it is a miss, the variation pattern P16 is used. Further, in state C, if it is a jackpot, the variation pattern P23 is used, and if it is a loss, the variation pattern P24 is used.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In addition, in other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be explained using FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a is set to one level lower (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage section 85a consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 fluctuation processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104) will be explained using FIG. 27. As shown in Figure 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of Figure 22, see Figure 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). In S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 variation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of special map 1 has passed (YES in S1901), the process moves to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process moves to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the status B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907) and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low certainty high base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state (normal state), and if it is a high probability high base state, it shifts to a high probability low base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and other operations such as stopping the fluctuating display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type, etc. (S1909) and ends the process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performed when a jackpot game or a small hit game related to special figure 2 is executed while the special figure 1 is being displayed. This is a process in which the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted, and when the jackpot game or small win game ends, the interrupted measurement is restarted. As a result, while the jackpot game or small win game regarding one special symbol is being executed, the win/fail determination process and the variable display regarding the other special symbol are not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be explained using FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON or not (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special It is determined whether the jackpot flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game related to special drawing 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON or not, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process is ended. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is finished. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

In addition, if it is determined in S2901 that the special pattern 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuating display of the first special pattern is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), whether the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON or not. Determine (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small winning flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small winning game related to the special drawing 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small winning flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the jackpot game or small winning game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), restarts measurement of special figure 1 variation time (S2908), and ends the process. As a result, it is possible to restart the suspended variation display (time measurement of variation time) of the first special symbol.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the interruption flag, there is a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") indicating that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a special symbol 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") of the second special symbol. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a "second interruption flag") indicating that the variable display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be explained using FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned OFF (S2002), and the first The special symbol 1 jackpot flag indicating execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process moves to S2004. As a result, in the special drawing 1, it is possible to indicate that the fluctuating display related to the jackpot is ended (the jackpot is confirmed) and the transition to the jackpot game is started.

In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the jackpot) is set to "4". (S2004), a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the process ends. Further, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the timing of stopping the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has ended. Note that this will result in a jackpot waiting state. In addition, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game will start. is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as a jackpot flag, a special figure 1 jackpot flag ("first jackpot A special figure 2 jackpot flag (also called a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a jackpot game is executed, a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as a "small hit flag") indicates that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a small hit and a small win game related to the small win is being executed. When a small winning game is executed, a small winning flag corresponding to the small winning flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamps are lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first jackpot is achieved, the display mode becomes "2R△4R▲15R△" (for example, ▲: lights on, △: lights off). Next, the special figure 2 movement process (S211) etc. will be explained using FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 movement process (S211), the special figure 1 movement process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), etc., a simplified explanation will be given below.

[Special figure 2 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 movement process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 movement process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) following the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment can perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by these special symbol 1 operation processing and special symbol 2 operation processing. That is, the expiration of the first special symbol reservation and the expiration of the second special symbol reservation ("variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol", "first special symbol validity judgment and second special symbol") It is possible to execute the judgment of validity and the judgment of validity in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the correctness determination based on the ball entering the second starting port or the third starting port (second special symbol correctness judgment) is better than the correctness judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (second special symbol correctness judgment). It is easier for the player to get a big hit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained), which is more profitable for the player than the first special symbol validity determination (FIG. 8(B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), performs special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if "special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), perform the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Perform accessory processing 1 (S1108), and if "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109). In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol validity determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) is a common process for the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) is Only the special figure 2 movement process (S211) is processed. This is because although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, the jackpot game related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. This is because the jackpot game related to the 2 special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol validity determination may include a small win. In this case, like the jackpot game, the small win game related to the first special symbol and the small win game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 validity judgment process]
The special figure 2 validity determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special symbol reservation storage section 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reservation) is Read out the stored random number counter value (label -TRND-A) for special symbol validity determination. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol validity determination is not a jackpot (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol validity determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small winning symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small winning fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processes are the same as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

In this S1313, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the first special symbol is not in the execution of the fluctuation display related to the jackpot, the low probability correctness judgment (S1303) and the high probability judgment (S1303) and high probability judgment ( S1309) and small hit determination (S1304, S1305) are also referred to as first special figure 2 validity determination (first second validity determination). In addition, in S1313, the small hit determination (S1305) to be executed when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, the first special symbol is executing a fluctuation display related to the jackpot, is changed to the second It is also called special figure 2 validity determination (second second validity determination). In the first special figure 2 correctness judgment (first second correctness judgment), a judgment process (big hit judgment and small hit judgment) is performed to judge whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or miss, and the second special figure 2 judgment is In the determination (second determination of success or failure), a determination process (determination of a small hit) is performed to determine whether it is a small hit or a miss.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254) follows the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (S1401 to S1420). )I do. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, refer to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. to select the fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small win, when it is determined that the small win variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small win table according to the game state.

Furthermore, in state B and state C, the game is mainly performed based on the variable display of the second special symbol (determination of the validity of the second special symbol). Therefore, in state B and state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long time. On the other hand, in state A, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the first special symbol (determination of the validity of the first special symbol). Therefore, in state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, making it possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long time. Therefore, in state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (few types, short time).

In this special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after selecting a variation pattern, other processes (S1404) are performed and this process is finished. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 variation start command is set to the output buffer of RAM, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. do.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation processing]
The special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104) shown in FIG. 27 (S1951 to S1959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28 (S2951 to S2959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special design 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the jackpot type (round counter setting process) and the special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. Although the processing when it is determined that it is ON is different, it is as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
Next, special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start processing to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process moves to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots a game ball into the right gaming area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped as a jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, a game ball is passed through a start gate to turn on a jackpot start flag and a jackpot game progresses (a round game is started). Here, if the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the jackpot is achieved, the gaming machine is maintained in a jackpot standby state in which the jackpot can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his/her seat and take a break such as going to the restroom, having a drink, or making a phone call. Then, after the end of the break, the player can shoot the game ball at any timing and allow the game ball to pass through the start gate 29, thereby making it possible to proceed with the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot device (first jackpot device 31) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open or not (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), whether it is time to open the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass through the start gate 29 and start the first round. Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a big prize opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) depending on the type of jackpot.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round is the specified maximum number of balls entering (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30), that is, whether or not the grand prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the terminal (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls entered (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process is performed to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period (S2117), turns on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and ends the process. Further, if it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round has ended, so it is then determined whether the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game state setting process described below is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122). , the jackpot start flag is turned OFF (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Jackpot game start process]
Next, using FIG. 40, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be explained. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON or not (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the jackpot is not yet passed through the start gate 29 in the jackpot waiting state. (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the variable probability flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (YES in S2152), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S2102), and the Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process moves to S2156. . That is, during execution of the jackpot game, in order to control to a low probability state and a low base state, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the jackpot game (round game).

Further, if it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. Further, if it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the starting gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the starting gate (YES in S2156), the The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the starting gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot waiting state. Further, in S2151, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. This allows the player to start (advance) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the gaming state setting process (S2121) will be explained using FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of variable probability jackpots are the 4R first jackpot, 15R third jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot, 2R fifth jackpot, and 2R sixth jackpot, and in S2201, the jackpot game It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of these five types. Then, if it is determined that the game that ended this time is a probability variable jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended is the 2R 5th jackpot (S2203) . If it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is started. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 50 high base states are set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high certainty high base state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and the process is started. Finish. As a result, a high base state is set for a maximum of 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, and a high base state with high certainty is achieved. If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, it is any of the 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, or 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the status B flag is turned OFF. Finish processing. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability low base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the game that ended was not a probability-variable jackpot, that is, it was a low-probability jackpot (low-probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game was a 2R 7th jackpot or not. is determined (S2206). If it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is started. Finish. As a result, a high base state is set for a maximum of 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, and becomes a low-probability high base state. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state The B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, a high base state is set for a maximum of 50 times after the end of the jackpot game, and becomes a low probability high base state.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122) will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special pattern operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON or not (S3001), and the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is a special pattern. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing will be executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3001) ), the special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
Next, special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be explained using FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) have been completed in the small winning game. If it is determined that the small winning end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time for the small win has elapsed. It is determined whether the time has come to start the first opening operation, or whether the interval time between multiple openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening operation (S2303). . Regarding the small winning game, the small winning game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the small winning symbol is fixed and stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the player passes through the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily decide when to start a jackpot game based on the starting gate, but cannot arbitrarily decide when to start a small win.

In S2303, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the second big winning opening 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see Figure 6) (S2304), finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls that entered the big winning hole during the 6 opening operations, that is, the 6th time. It is determined whether the sum of all the game balls entered during the release operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of balls entered (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the grand prize opening, that is, if the specified number of balls has not been reached after opening the grand prize opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening during the 6th opening operation has reached the specified number of balls entering (10) (YES in S2306), the grand prize opening (second grand prize The opening 35) is closed (S2314), and the process moves to the small hit ending process of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small winning opening counter is It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process ends as it is in order to start the next release operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process moves to the small win ending process in S2311. In S2311, as a small winning ending process to end the small winning game, a small winning ending command is set (S2311), a small winning ending period is started (S2312), a small winning ending flag is set (S2313), Finish processing. Incidentally, the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the 6 opening operations have been completed (or the specified number of game balls have entered the ball), so It is determined whether the small winning ending time has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small winning game in a high-accuracy/low-base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next jackpot while increasing the number of balls held, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In addition, at the start of the small winning game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON. Further, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small winning game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be explained using FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON or not (S3101). If it is determined that it is related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special symbol 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special pattern 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 small winning flag is ON, that is, the small winning game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3101). ), the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Held pitch count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 is read ( S2501). Next, data on the number of held balls (a held ball number command for transmitting the held ball number information to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball count process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is variable rate, whether it is playing a winning game, how many balls are on hold, whether it is variable rate or time saving), Data regarding the number of remaining fluctuations, etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), a power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As explained in detail above, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has unique effects not found in conventional pachinko game machines, or has unique effects compared to conventional pachinko game machines. It has a remarkable effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, a jackpot occurs in the special symbol validity determination (the first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information") A high probability state occurs (a benefit is given) based on the jackpot symbol (which is stopped and displayed in a "specific display mode"), and when a predetermined condition is met, a high probability state ( Benefits) will be terminated.

The process (gaming state setting process (S2121)) for granting this high probability state (privilege) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". In addition, the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the fluctuating display and stop display are performed to show the same validity judgment result. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the production symbol is stopped and displayed at the winning production symbol (specific display mode)" .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be explained based on FIGS. 47 to 52. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the production control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game-control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, data related to performance control in the event of a power outage such as a power outage is backed up. For this reason, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after recovering from a power outage such as a power outage (returning from a power outage), the effect will be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. The state returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed updating process (S4005), the values of various performance determining random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for performance determination includes a random number for determining a variable performance that determines the mode of performance symbol game performance to be executed (variable performance pattern), a random number for determining a preview performance that determines a preview performance, and a random number for determining a performance symbol that determines a performance symbol. There are random numbers, etc. The random number updating method can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, the random numbers may be added in increments of 2 instead of incrementing them in increments of 1. The random number for performance determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing may be, for example, when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball command) notifying that a starting ball has arrived, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball entering command) notifying the start of fluctuation. This can be done when a fluctuation start command (fluctuation start command) is sent, or when a fluctuation effect pattern (to be described later) is determined. The acquired random number for effect determination is stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 100. Among the boards 107, the command is sent to the control board to which the corresponding command is sent. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various presentation devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) to perform various presentations according to the received command. (Performance pattern game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.). The production control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of performance symbols, etc., executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, and third image display device 72 is performed. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, and control the audio output from speakers.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be explained using FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or not, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be explained using FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the production button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) that outputs lamp data for causing lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and outputs drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). Incidentally, the lamp data and drive data are created by a 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be explained using FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010), first, received command analysis processing (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created in the 2ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch data stored in the switch status acquisition process is Switch processing is performed to set the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described using FIG. 51. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a starting ball command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a starting ball entering command has not been received (NO in S4401). , the process moves to S4403, and when it is determined that the starting ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the production pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process moves to S4403. Performance pending information storage processing (S4402) stores various information (pre-judgment results, jackpot type determination error) included in the starting ball entry command (special chart 1 starting ball command or special chart 2 starting ball command) received in S4401. (game information such as numerical values, random fluctuation pattern values, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the starting ball entry command (when generating the command) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special chart 1 starting ball command that corresponds to the number of reserved balls of special chart 1 "4", the preliminary judgment result and hit type included in the special chart 1 starting ball command This information is stored as special figure 1 performance pending information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 performance pending information storage area. The performance pending information stored in this way is used to execute various performances such as a variable performance, a preview performance, and a performance mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (performance pending information) of the production pending information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure pending storage section) in the above-mentioned main control board (main control section) 80. This matches the stored content (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). From this, the performance pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be an "acquired information storage means."

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation production start process ( S4404) and moves to the process of S4405, and if it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process moves to the process of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the fluctuation performance is started. Performs variable performance termination processing to terminate (S4406). In the fluctuating performance end process (S4406), a fluctuating performance end command for stopping and displaying the performance symbol 8 and ending the fluctuating performance is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 that was being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is stopped and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable effects refer to various effects performed in accordance with the variable display of special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether a winning game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related commands are commands sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games), and specifically, the winning game related commands are commands that are sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games). ), a round start command that is sent when a round starts, a round end command that is sent when a round ends, an ending command that is sent when a jackpot game ends, and the first big prize opening in a round game. This applies to the 1st grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering 30, the 2nd grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering the 2nd grand prize opening in a small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process moves to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to execution of performance (big hit game performance, small win game performance) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening performance command that specifies an opening performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the received command is a round start command, the command A round performance command that specifies a round performance according to the round specified based on the round is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending that specifies an ending performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command to the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a big winning opening ball entry command (1st big winning opening ball entry command, 2nd big winning opening ball entry command), the big winning opening (1st big winning opening ball entry command) specified based on the command A ball entering performance command that specifies a ball entering performance according to the ball entering the opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 is set in the sub output buffer. When the various performance commands related to the set winning games are sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 controls the opening performance and the round according to the progress of the winning games. Performances, ball entering performances, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed to end this process. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variable effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be explained using FIG. 52. In the variable performance start processing (S4402), first, performance determination random number processing (S4501) is performed to obtain various performance determination random numbers such as a variable performance determination random number, a preview performance determination random number, and a performance pattern determination random number. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the performance symbol game performance (variable performance) to be executed, the mode of the preview performance (including the presence or absence of the preview performance), the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command (information that designates a fluctuation pattern) that designates the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command includes fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, gaming state information that designates the current gaming state, and determination of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination. It includes the result, symbol information specifying the jackpot type, etc. (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of fluctuation pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, the production symbol game production to be started this time It becomes possible to determine whether the (variable display of performance symbols) is related to special figure 1 or special figure 2. Incidentally, the variable pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in other processes other than the variable performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production mode A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, and mode status "4" corresponds to production mode C. The mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the performance mode is a performance mode mainly using the image display device 7, and when the performance mode is different, part or all of the performance mode of the game performance, such as a preview performance or a reach performance, is different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 may vary depending on the production mode, such as the appearance of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.) being different, or the appearing characters, items, and background images being different. considered to be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can also be executed in a manner according to the production mode, and when providing multiple game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be done. In this embodiment, production modes A and B are executed when controlled to a low-accuracy low base state, production modes C and D are executed when controlled to a high-accuracy low base state, and production mode E is executed when controlled to a low-accuracy high-base state and when controlled to a high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, when the production mode is one of A to D, the player can understand whether the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state or a high-probability low-base state by checking the production mode. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player checks the production mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. be. In that sense, production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decoration member 14, etc. are used to create a variable effect pattern (a variable effect pattern, a effect pattern, etc.) which is mainly controlled by the sub-control unit 90. A variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) and a preview performance determination table for determining game performance (S4504) are set. Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, a variation production pattern determination table to be used and a preview production determination table are set. . That is, it is equipped with a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of preview performance determination tables, and from these, a predetermined variable performance pattern determination table and preview performance determination table are set based on the gaming state (performance mode), etc. do. For example, if the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see Figure 9), the variation performance pattern determination table will be used to determine when the jackpot corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance determination table are set. The variable production pattern determination table is mainly used to determine the execution mode of production symbol game production (variation mode of production symbols, etc.), and contains multiple variable production pattern determination tables ( (not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current performance mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable performance pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variable effect obtained in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern that matches the specified variable pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation performance pattern, the variation mode of the performance symbol 8 (execution mode of the performance symbol game performance) mainly displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production symbol game production, when performing a reach production (design game production with reach effect) or when performing a character production using a specific character (character production symbol game production), the reach production or character A case where the performance is not executed (ready-to-reach non-performance symbol game performance), etc. is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol validity judgment indicates a jackpot, in which three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double number). In the case where a mode (jackpot mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with the symbols (same production pattern) that constitute the jackpot mode. ), and while the remaining one continues to be displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), whether or not the remaining one production symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol (three same production symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a performance that shows. At this time, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character as the performance symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and whether or not the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show this with a performance. Such game performances (ready-to-reach performances and character performances described later) can also be referred to as story performances (specific game performances) or objective performances (specific game performances). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot and increase his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for effect design determination obtained in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect pattern 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect pattern") is determined and set. Performance Symbols The performance symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game performance is a result of the special symbol validity judgment, and if it is a reach or miss, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the performance symbols is considered to be a different one from the other production symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, such as "635", is different from the other production symbols. It is said to be a barakeme with different production designs.

Further, in S4506, a preview performance to be executed in conjunction with the variable performance pattern (performance symbol game performance) is determined. In addition, the performance including the preview performance to be executed is also referred to as the performance symbol game performance. This preview performance is a performance (in advance) that indicates the possibility that the result of the current performance symbol game performance will be stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner before the performance symbol stops display (determined stop display) (during the fluctuating display of the performance symbol). This is a public announcement). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in S4501 and the preview performance determination table set in S4504, a preview performance that matches the specified variation pattern and the determined variation performance pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variable performance pattern and preview performance set in S4505 and S4506, a variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable performance start process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, in S4505 Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a variable effect etc. based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, a variable display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the performance display 102 is also performed.

(Other configuration 1 of Example 1)
In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is opened and closed in both the low base state (1/240 winning a normal figure) and the high base state (239/240 winning a normal figure). The structure is such that game balls can enter the ball. As a result, in a high-accuracy/low-base state in which a right-handed game is played, a game is performed in which the game ball enters the second starting hole and the third starting hole and the second special symbol validity determination is executed.

Instead of such an embodiment, the probability of hitting a common symbol in the low base state may be set to "0" (0/240), and the second starting port may not open or close in the low base state. In the case of such a configuration, in a high accuracy low base state in which a right-handed game is played, a game is performed in which a game ball enters the third starting hole and a second special symbol validity determination is executed. In addition, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the second starting port can be opened and closed (239/240 per normal map), so the second starting port and the third starting port A game is performed in which a game ball is entered into the ball and a second special symbol validity determination is executed.

(Other configuration 2 of Example 1)
In addition, in the above-mentioned Example 1, the fixed type first starting port 20, into which the ball enters when playing a left-handed game, is connected to the first special symbol by determining the validity of the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. It was used as a ball entrance that fluctuates. In addition, the variable second starting port 21 and the fixed third starting port 25, into which the ball enters when playing a right-handed game, are both subjected to a second special symbol propriety determination based on the entering of the game ball. A second special symbol is displayed at the ball entrance.

In addition, by arranging a variable second starting opening upstream of the second big winning opening 35 that opens and closes in the small winning game, in the high base state (high accurate high base state or high accurate low base state) Even if the second special symbol validity judgment is executed and a small hit occurs, the game ball is received at the second starting port on the upstream side and is configured to be difficult to flow into the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side. . On the other hand, in the high accuracy low base state, if the second special symbol validity judgment is executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole and/or the third starting hole and a small winning game is executed, the second Since the opening frequency (opening time per unit time) of the second starting port on the upstream side of the second big winning hole 35 is in a decreasing state, game balls that are not accepted into the second starting hole are placed in the second big winning hole 35. It becomes possible to enter a ball and win a gaming profit (prize ball) through a small winning game. This makes the high-probability low base state a gaming state more advantageous than the high-probability high base state (high-probability high base state or high-probability low base state).

Instead of this mode, the fixed first starting port 20 into which the ball enters when playing a left-handed game is used to determine whether the first special symbol is correct or not based on the entry of the game ball and display the first special symbol. The variable type second starting port 21, through which the ball enters when playing a right-handed game, is used as a ball entry port that fluctuates and displays the ball, and the first special symbol is displayed by determining the validity of the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. A fixed type third starting port 25, which is used as a ball entry port to display a variable display, is used to enter the ball when playing a right-handed game, and a second special symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball to display the second special symbol. It may also be used as a ball entrance that is displayed in a variable manner. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of hitting a common symbol in the low base state is set to "0".

According to such a configuration, when playing a right-handed game in a high base state (high-accuracy high-base state or high-accuracy low-base state), the first special symbol validity determination is performed based on the ball entering the second starting port 21. (no small hit) is performed, and a second special symbol correctness determination (with small hit) is performed based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. As in Example 1, the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set much higher than the frequency of balls entering the third starting port 26, so the second starting point is Most of the game balls flowing down into the mouth or the third starting port will enter the second starting port. That is, in a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed in the high base state, the execution frequency of the first special symbol validity determination (ball entering the second starting port) is higher than the second special symbol validity determination. (ball entering the third starting port) is performed much more frequently.

Therefore, the high base state is digested (executed) by executing the first special symbol validity judgment that does not result in a small hit, so the frequency of occurrence of small hits in the high base state is lower than in the configuration of the first embodiment. be destroyed. Also in this configuration, as in the first embodiment, by arranging the variable second starting port 21 on the upstream side of the variable second big winning port 35, in the high base state, when a small hit occurs, the second It becomes possible to prevent game balls from entering the grand prize opening 35 as much as possible. In addition to this, in this configuration, the variable second starting port is used as the ball entry port for determining the validity of the first special symbol without a small hit, thereby reducing the possibility of a small hit occurring in a high base state. reduced. This more reliably reduces the possibility that the player will earn gaming profits through small winning games in a high base state. Furthermore, this makes it possible to clarify the difference in playability (advantage) between the high base state and the high-probability low base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this configuration, during a right-handed game (low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy low base state), the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination are determined by simultaneous fluctuations. Both validity judgments will be executed. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot as in Example 1, instead of making the second special symbol validity determination more advantageous than the first special symbol validity determination, in the case of a jackpot, the first special symbol It is preferable that both the correctness judgment and the second special symbol correctness judgment have no advantages or disadvantages (for example, the executable jackpot types are the same and the distribution thereof is also the same).

Next, the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 53 to 56. Note that in the second embodiment, some control processing is different from the control processing described in the first embodiment, and other control processing is the same. Therefore, in the following, only the different control processes of the first embodiment will be explained, and the explanation of other common control processes will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when a high probability is set after the end of the jackpot game (by the game ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game), the gaming state of the high probability (probability variable function) is set as a jackpot. Regardless of the type, it will continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, if a high base state is set after the end of a jackpot game, a value of "100" or "50" will be set in the state B counter depending on the type of jackpot, and the next jackpot will not occur during the high base state. In this case, the high base state is set (transitioned) to the low base state when the value of the state B counter becomes "0". Incidentally, this state B counter is supposed to be decremented by 1 every time the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is executed once.

That is, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state and "100" is set to the state B counter, the high probability high base state In, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed 100 times, the gaming state shifts to the high accuracy low base state. In addition, if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state and "50" is set to the state B counter, in the high probability high base state, the special symbol (first special symbol or When the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 50 times, the gaming state shifts to a high-accuracy-low base state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when a high probability is set after the end of a jackpot game (by the game ball passing through a specific area during a jackpot game), the probability variation counter changes depending on the type of jackpot. If a value of "100" or "10000" is set and the next jackpot does not occur during the gaming state with the high probability, the high probability (probability of special symbol correctness judgment) is set such that the value of the probability change counter is " 0'', the probability is set (transitioned) to a low probability (predetermined probability). In addition, this probability change counter is supposed to subtract 1 every time the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is executed once.

In addition, when "10000" is set in the probability change counter, the probability of a jackpot in the special symbol correctness judgment in a high probability state, the one-time fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) Considering the time and the daily business hours of the game parlor, this is essentially equivalent to continuing the high probability until the next jackpot occurs. Therefore, depending on the type of jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment has two cases: a high-probability game state changes to a low-probability game state based on the number of display changes of special symbols, and a case where it continues until the next jackpot. have.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a value of "100" or "50" (different values) is set in the state B counter depending on the type of jackpot, If the next jackpot does not occur during the high base state, the high base state is set (transitioned) to the low base state when the value of the state B counter becomes "0". Note that, unlike the first embodiment, this state B counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed once. That is, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment changes the high base state to the low base state (changes the game state) based on the number of executions of the variable display of the normal symbols.

For example, if the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game is set to a high probability high base state and "100" is set to the state B counter, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be displayed 100 times in the high probability high base state. When executed, the gaming state shifts to a high probability low base state. In addition, if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state and "50" is set to the state B counter, the normal symbol fluctuation display will be displayed 50 times in the high probability high base state. When executed, the gaming state shifts to a high probability low base state.

FIG. 53 is an explanation of the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S5000) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S5001), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S5001), the process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S5001), a normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S5002) and the process moves to S5003. In S5003, it is determined whether the state B flag (high base state setting flag) is ON (S5003), and if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON, that is, the low base state (NO in S5003), S5007 Move to processing. If it is determined in S5003 that the state B flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S5003), then the value of the state B counter is subtracted by "1" (S5004), and the process moves to S5005.

In S5005, it is determined whether the value of the state B counter has become "0" (S5005), and if it is determined that it has not become "0" (NO in S5005), the state B flag is left ON and S5007 Shift to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5005 that the value of the state B counter has become "0" (YES in S5005), the state B flag is turned OFF (S5006) and the process moves to S5007. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the low base state. Further, by turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low certainty high base state, it will shift to a low probability low base state (normal state), and if it is a high probability high base state, it will shift to a high probability low base state (advantageous state).

In S5007, the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S5007), and then the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is displayed according to the judgment result of the random number for determining the validity of the normal symbol (normal symbol winning or normal symbol missing). Performs other processing such as stopping at (S5008), and ends the processing.

Further, in the first embodiment, each state (state A, state B, state C) has one type of normal symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds or 1 second). In Example 2, in place of such an aspect, state B has a plurality of normal symbol fluctuation times. For example, in state B, there is a fluctuation time of 1 second, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the selected ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern sorted by the value (for example, any value from 0 to 99). The distribution ratio of the fluctuation time is, for example, 1 second: 40%, 10 seconds: 40%, and 30 seconds: 20%, but any ratio may be used.

For example, when the gaming state is set to state B (high base state), the more short fluctuation times are selected as the normal symbol fluctuation time, the sooner state B (high base state) ends. It then moves to a low base state. On the other hand, the more long fluctuation times are selected, the longer state B (high base state) continues, and then shifts to the low base state. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability high base state, the high probability low base state is more advantageous to the player than the high probability high base state, so the short variation time is used as the normal symbol variation time. It is more profitable for the player to end the high base state early and move to the high probability low base state if the base state is selected frequently. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a low probability high base state, the low probability high base state is more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base state, so the long fluctuation time is used as the normal symbol fluctuation time. It is more profitable for the player to continue the high base state for a long period of time with many selections and generate a jackpot during that time, or to shift to a low probability low base state.

In other aspects, even in state A and/or state B, a plurality of normal symbol fluctuation times may be set. Further, in state B, it is preferable that the variation time of more types of normal symbols than in state A and/or state B can be selected.

FIG. 54 is an explanation of the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S5100) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation process (S5100), first, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S5101). In S5101, if it is determined that the variation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S5101), special figure 1 variation interruption processing is performed (S5109) and the process ends. On the other hand, in S5101, if it is determined that the variation time of special figure 1 has passed (YES in S5101), a special figure 1 variation stop command is set (S5102), and the process moves to S5103.

Next, in S5103, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S5103). In S5103, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the high probability gaming state (high probability state) (YES in S5103), the special symbol executed during the high probability (high probability state, probability variation state) The value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of fluctuations is subtracted by 1 (S5104), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not (S5105). If it is determined in S5105 that the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (YES in S5105), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107. Thereby, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination is set from high probability to low probability. Further, by turning off the probability change flag, the gaming state shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state. Specifically, if the state is a high-certain high base state, the state shifts to a low-probability high base state, and if the state is a high-probability low base state, the state shifts to a low-probability low base state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5103 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, the game state is a low probability gaming state (NO in S5103), the process moves to S5107. In S5107, the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "3" (S5107), and other operations such as stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the special symbol correctness judgment random number and jackpot type determination random number (S5108) and ends the process.

FIG. 55 is an explanation of the special symbol 2 changing process (S5200) of the second embodiment. As shown in Figure 55, in the special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S5201), first, the fluctuation time of special symbol 2 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1254 of Figure 31, see Figure 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S5201). In S5201, if it is determined that the variation time of special figure 2 has not elapsed (NO in S5201), special figure 2 variation interruption processing is performed (S5209), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S5201, when it is determined that the variation time of special figure 2 has passed (YES in S5201), a special figure 2 variation stop command is set (S5202), and the process moves to S5203.

Next, in S5203, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S5203). In S5203, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the high probability gaming state (high probability state) (YES in S5203), the special symbol executed during the high probability (high probability state, probability variation state) The value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of fluctuations is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not (S5205). If it is determined in S5205 that the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (YES in S5205), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207. Thereby, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination is set from high probability to low probability. Further, by turning off the probability change flag, the gaming state shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state. Specifically, if the state is a high-certain high base state, the state shifts to a low-probability high base state, and if the state is a high-probability low base state, the state shifts to a low-probability low base state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5203 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, the game state is a low probability gaming state (NO in S5203), the process moves to S5207. In S5207, the special symbol 2 operation status is set to "3" (S5207), and other operations such as stopping the fluctuating display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type, etc. (S5208) and ends the process.

FIG. 56 is an explanation of the gaming state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment. In addition, in the gaming state setting process (S5050) of Example 2, the same flow number is attached and demonstrated to the process similar to the process of the gaming state setting process (S2121) of Example 1. In the game state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In Example 2, as in Example 1, five types of variable probability jackpots are defined as 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot, and in S2201 , it is determined whether the jackpot game falls under any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot game that has ended this time is a jackpot game related to a variable probability jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variable flag is turned ON (S2202), and the process moves to S2203.

In S2203, it is determined whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (S2203). If it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (YES in S2203), the probability variation counter is set to "100" (S5051), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state B counter is set to "100" (S5051). is set to "50" (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, a high base state is set for a maximum of 50 times (the number of fluctuating displays of normal symbols), and a high base state with high accuracy is established. In this way, in the case of the 2R fifth jackpot, the value set to the variable probability counter and the value set to the state B counter are different values. However, depending on the variation time of the special symbol selected in the high-accuracy, high-base state and the variation time of the normal symbol, the gaming state may change from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the low-accuracy, high-base state; In some cases, the state changes to the low base state, and in other cases, the counter becomes "0" at the same time and shifts to the low base state. Moreover, the timing of the change also differs from time to time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), the probability variation counter is set to "100" (S5052), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), and the state B counter is set to "100" (S5052). is set to "100" (S2211), and the process ends. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, a high base state is set for a maximum of 100 times (the number of fluctuating displays of normal symbols), resulting in a highly accurate high base state. Further, in the case of the 2R fifth jackpot, the value set in the probability variation counter and the value set in the state B counter are the same value. However, depending on the variation time of the special symbol selected in the high-accuracy, high-base state and the variation time of the normal symbol, the gaming state may change from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the low-accuracy, high-base state; In some cases, the state changes to the low base state, and in other cases, the counter becomes "0" at the same time and shifts to the low base state. Moreover, the timing of the change also differs from time to time.

In addition, in Example 2, the same "100" was set in the probability change counter after the end of the 2R fifth jackpot game and after the end of the 2R sixth jackpot game, but by changing to this mode, different You may also set a value. For example, like the state B counter, it may be set to "50" after the end of the 2R fifth jackpot game, and may be set to "100" after the end of the 2R sixth jackpot game. Alternatively, both may be made smaller than the state B counter, and may be set to "20" after the end of the 2R fifth jackpot game and "30" after the end of the 2R sixth jackpot game. In addition, both may be made larger than the state B counter, and may be set to "100" after the end of the 2R fifth jackpot game, and "150" after the end of the 2R sixth jackpot game. Alternatively, only one of them may be made larger than the state B counter, and it may be set to "100" after the end of the 2R fifth jackpot game and "50" after the end of the 2R sixth jackpot game.

In S2209, if it is determined that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, it is any of the 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, or 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the probability variation counter is set to ``10000''. ” (S5053), and the process ends with the status B flag kept OFF. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability low base state. Incidentally, this high-certain low base state substantially continues until the next jackpot occurs.

If it is determined in S2201 that the game that ended was not a probability-variable jackpot, that is, it was a low-probability jackpot (low-probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game was a 2R 7th jackpot or not. Determine (S2206). If it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is started. Finish. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, a high base state is set for a maximum of 100 times (the number of fluctuating displays of normal symbols), and a low certainty high base state is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state The B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, a high base state is set for a maximum of 50 times (the number of fluctuating displays of normal symbols), and a low certainty high base state is set.

In the above-described second embodiment, in the gaming state of the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, there are a plurality of variation times of different lengths as the variation display of the normal symbol, and a predetermined variation time is selected from them, The value of the state B counter is decreased based on the number of executions of the variable display of normal symbols. An example has been described in which the gaming state is changed to a high probability low base state or a low probability low base state when the value of the state B counter becomes "0". That is, an example has been described in which the condition for changing the high base state to the low base state is the number of executions of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Instead of or in addition to this mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied such as after the end of a jackpot game, and the game state is set when the base is high, the variation time of the normal symbol is set as the first. A normal symbol first condition state (first specific condition state) that is determined based on one specific condition, and a normal symbol second condition state (second specific condition state) that determines the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on a second specific condition. ). And when the normal symbol second condition state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (average time of fluctuation time) shall be shorter than when the normal symbol first condition state is set. In addition, the normal symbol first condition state and the normal symbol second condition state are both states in which the time saving function is activated for the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the high base state is switched to the low base state. Accordingly, the time-saving function becomes inactive. Also, in any of the game states, the first condition state of normal symbols and the second condition state of normal symbols, there may be a plurality of variation times of the normal symbols.

According to such an aspect, the value of the state B counter is "0" in the gaming state of the high probability high base state and the second condition state than in the gaming state of the high probability high base state and the first condition state. It is highly likely that the period will be short. Therefore, in the gaming state of the high probability high base state and the second condition state, there is a high possibility that the timing from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state will be earlier. There is also a high possibility that the state will change from a high-certain high base state to a high-certain low base state. That is, the gaming state of the high probability high base state and the first condition state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player.

(Other configuration 3 of Examples 1 and 2)
Further, in the first and second embodiments described above, only a variable time of 30 seconds is set as the variable time for jackpot when the result of the first special symbol validity determination in state C that is advantageous to the player is a jackpot. Instead of such a mode, multiple variable times such as 30 seconds and 240 seconds (second variable time) can be used as the variable time for jackpot when the result of the first special symbol validity determination in state C is a jackpot. May be set.

According to the playability of this pachinko game machine (simultaneous change machine), even though the game state is set to state C (high probability low base state), the first special symbol immediately after that (immediately, early) If the judgment is executed and the result is a jackpot, the game state of the high probability/low base state that has been set will end, and a jackpot game may start. Further, it is fine if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high-probability low-base state again, but it may shift to other gaming states such as the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state. In such a case, even though the player is in an advantageous high-probability low-base state, the player performs the second special symbol validity judgment in the high-probability low base state and plays a small hit game. It is difficult to fully enjoy a highly interesting special game (small win rush) in which game profits are obtained by frequently playing the game, and there is a possibility that the game becomes less interesting.

Even in such a case, if the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot, the jackpot variation time should be relatively long, such as 240 seconds (longer than other jackpot variation times). By setting the jackpot fluctuation time (longer than the jackpot fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol validity determination), the jackpot fluctuation time (longer than the jackpot fluctuation time of the second special symbol validity determination) can be set immediately after setting the high accuracy low base state (for example, the 1st fluctuation or 4 fluctuation time). Even if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot (within fluctuation, etc.), the second special symbol validity determination is executed multiple times during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, and small winning games are frequently played (multiple This makes it possible to earn gaming profits by allowing players to play games (occurred twice).

This makes it possible to determine the validity of the second special symbol and to display the variation during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, and also allows the second special symbol to be displayed during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol (first specific variation period). A special second special symbol validity determination (second special symbol validity determination, second (judgment of validity). Also, the fluctuation time for small hits may be 4 seconds as shown in FIG. 9, or the fluctuation time for small hits during execution of the fluctuation time for jackpots when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot is 2 seconds. It is also possible to use an even shorter variation time such as . In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no small hit in the result of the first special symbol validity determination, such control processing is not executed if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a jackpot. shall be taken as a thing.

(Other configuration 4 of Examples 1 and 2)
In addition, the probability of selecting a long variation time (240 seconds) as the jackpot variation time when the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot is set for a specific period after the high probability low base state is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is also possible to set the probability to be high. For example, after the high accuracy low base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol fluctuation display (the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol If the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot before the symbol) is executed, the probability of selecting a longer fluctuation time (240 seconds) than in other periods (subsequent period) is increased. You can make it higher. Specifically, a long variation time (240 seconds) may be selected with 100% probability from the time the high-accuracy-low base state is set until the special symbol variation display is executed four times, A long variation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a probability of 60%. In addition, during the period after the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 4 times, a long fluctuation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a 30% probability, or a long fluctuation time may not be selected (up to 4 rotations). (dedicated variable time).

Also, not only during the period until the four special symbol fluctuation displays are executed, but only when the first special symbol correctness judgment result after the high accuracy low base state is set is a jackpot. The probability of selecting a long variation time (240 seconds) may be increased. As a result, even if the first special symbol validity determination results in a jackpot immediately after setting the high-accuracy/low base state, the second special symbol validity determination will be executed multiple times during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. , it becomes possible to play small winning games frequently and obtain gaming profits.

(Other configuration 5 of Examples 1 and 2)
In addition to or in addition to the above-mentioned configuration, the fluctuation time (missing fluctuation time) when the result of the first special symbol validity judgment for a predetermined period after the high accuracy low base state is set is a wrong one, It may be made different from the deviation fluctuation time after exceeding a predetermined period. Specifically, the predetermined period may be from the time when the high-accuracy-low base state is set until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed four times (a specific number of times). That is, in this configuration, after the high accuracy low base state is set, the deviation variation time of the first special symbol executed from the first to fourth times is different from the deviation variation time of the first special symbol executed from the fifth time onward. Set to variable time.

In addition, similarly to the configuration (other configuration 2 of Example 1), the fixed type first starting port 20 into which the ball enters when playing a left-handed game is set to the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. The ball entrance is used as a ball entry port that variably displays the first special symbol after making a right or wrong decision, and the variable second starting port 21, through which the ball enters when playing a right-handed game, is used as the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. The ball entrance is used as a ball entry port that variably displays the first special symbol after determining whether the game ball is correct or not, and the fixed third starting port 25 through which the ball enters when playing a right-handed game is used as the second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. It is used as a ball entrance that performs a validity judgment and variably displays a second special symbol. In addition, the probability of winning a common symbol in the low base state is set to "0" or a low probability of winning, such as "1/290".

Here, the high-probability low-base state is considered to be an advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to generate a small winning game by playing right-handed games and play the game while earning more gaming profits than in the high-base state. . In addition, when the probability of winning a normal symbol in the low base state (high accuracy low base state) is set to "0", the high accuracy low base state is determined by the second special symbol correctness judgment based on the ball entering the third starting hole. The game is played mainly by Even if the probability of winning a regular symbol in the high-accuracy/low-base state is set to "1/290", the main subject is the second special symbol validity determination.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy/low-base state is a gaming state that is set after the end of a predetermined jackpot game, but since the pachinko game machine of this embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine, it can be set during a jackpot game or before the start of a jackpot game. If special symbol 1 is reserved (maximum number of memory is 4) in The variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the third starting hole in the right-handed game and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel (simultaneously).

In this way, originally, the high-accuracy/low-base state is a gameplay where you can enjoy the occurrence of a small winning game by executing the second special symbol correctness judgment with a small winning judgment. Immediately after the start of the high-probability-low base state, the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination, which do not include the small hit determination, are executed in parallel. The player feels troublesome if the first special symbol validity determination without such a small hit determination is executed for a long period of time, and if the first special symbol validity determination results in a jackpot, the high-accuracy, low-base state ends. If this happens, there is a risk that the player's interest in and desire to play the game will be significantly reduced. Therefore, it is better to end the parallel period in which the first special symbol validity determination (including variable display) and the second special symbol validity determination (including variable display) are executed in parallel as soon as possible to improve the gameplay. This will give the players a sense of security and increase their interest in gaming after the parallel period ends.

Therefore, as described above, in a gaming machine having another configuration, at least a short variation time (for example, 1 second, the first error variation time) as the error variation time of the first special symbol in the high-accuracy/low base state. and a long variation time (for example, 120 seconds, a second deviation variation time). Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the first number of times, 4 times corresponding to the upper limit number of reservations of the first special symbol) after setting the high-accuracy/low-base state (second gaming state), If the result of the first special symbol validity determination is negative, a short variation time (1 second) must be selected and executed. As a result, even if 4 (predetermined number, 1st number) of the 1st special symbol reservations are stored at the start of the high-accuracy/low-base state, the above-mentioned parallel period will be approximately 4 seconds)" (Actually, since the symbol stop time etc. are added, the parallel period will be about 6 seconds), making it possible to end the parallel period in an extremely short period of time. In addition, the period in which the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 4 times (the first execution period) may be set until the variable display of the first special symbol is performed (started) four times, or the period in which the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed is 4 times (first execution period). The total number of times of variable display and the number of variable displays of the second special symbol may be executed (started) four times. Further, this predetermined period is not limited to four times, but may be eight times, which is the sum of the upper limit number of first special symbol reservations and the upper limit number of second special symbol reservations.

Further, after the fluctuation display has been completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times corresponding to the upper limit number of reservations of the first special symbol) after setting the high-accuracy/low-base state, the first special symbol validity determination is executed for some reason, If the determination result is negative, a long fluctuation time (120 seconds) is assumed to be performed as the negative fluctuation time. This happens when you start a right-handed game with a high-accuracy, low-base condition, and then after the above-mentioned parallel period ends, you leave your seat to go to the bathroom, use the phone, etc., or your hand slips and the handle becomes detached. In some cases, such as when the ball is closed, the firing strength may become loose and the user may unintentionally play a left-handed game temporarily.

In such a case, even if multiple game balls enter the first starting port 20, if the first special symbol validity determination is repeated in a short period of time, the first special symbol validity determination may unintentionally occur. There is a risk of hitting the jackpot and ending the high-accuracy, low-base state. Therefore, after the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol has been displayed in a variable manner a predetermined number of times (4 times) (after the end of the parallel period), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner again, and the first special symbol is determined to be correct or not. If the result is an error, a long variation time (for example, 120 seconds, a second error variation time) is selected as the error variation time.

In addition, it has been explained that during the predetermined period after the start of the high-accuracy/low-base state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a short fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the predetermined period is 1. The fluctuation time is longer than the off fluctuation time selected by the special symbol. In addition, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot during the predetermined period, the jackpot fluctuation time of the first special symbol is , select a long variation time (for example, 240 seconds). As a result, even if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot immediately after setting the high accuracy low base state, even during the jackpot fluctuation time, the second special symbol validity determination described above will be executed. It becomes possible to generate winning games and earn gaming profits.

In addition, the predetermined period after setting the high-accuracy/low-base state (after the start) is the loss variation time of the first special symbol and the jackpot variation time of the first special symbol (may be the jackpot variation time of a specific jackpot, for example, 240 seconds). (1st specific fluctuation period)) are determined in advance, so if it is determined in advance that there is a jackpot in the predetermined 1st special symbol reservation, after setting the high certainty low base state (starting After that, a special performance mode is executed to execute a specific game performance (performance mode name, specific background performance on the display screen, display of a specific character). Then, a common special performance mode may be executed during the execution period of the winning variation related to the first special symbol and the subsequent execution period of the jackpot variation.

For example, if a loss is stored in holds 1 to 3 of the first special drawing hold and a jackpot is stored in hold 4, these four variable display times (approximately 243 seconds of variable display time (1+1+1+240)) are used. A special effect mode may also be executed. In addition to this, a special performance mode may also be executed during the jackpot game. In this way, during the period of 243 seconds of these four variable display times, the second special symbol validity judgment is executed, the gaming profit (prize ball) is acquired by the occurrence of the small winning game, and after this, the 1. A special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, a specific jackpot game is executed, and it is certain that a gaming profit (prize ball) will be obtained in the jackpot game as well.

Therefore, the gaming profit acquisition period (first gaming profit acquisition period) due to small winning games during the four variable display times and the gaming profit acquisition period (second gaming profit acquisition period) due to successive jackpot games are determined in advance. Since they occur consecutively in a predetermined period, by executing the special performance mode during both of these periods, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting and effective game performance. In addition, by displaying the gaming profit that is the sum of the gaming profits earned in both periods (total gaming profit) on a predetermined display section on the display screen, the player feels that he has earned a large amount of gaming profit, and It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, this special production mode is a production mode that occurs only when the result of the first special symbol validity judgment becomes a jackpot in a predetermined period after the high accuracy low base state is set, and after that, the first special Even if the result of symbol validity determination is a jackpot, the special performance mode may not be executed. In addition, this special production mode is a production mode that occurs only when a jackpot is stored in the first special figure hold (any of 1 to 4) when the high-accuracy/low base state is set (started). Good too.

In addition, the jackpot fluctuation time (first specific It is desirable that the fluctuation period) be a relatively long fluctuation time. For example, in the high-accuracy/low-base state (second gaming state), if the result of the first special symbol validity determination (first validity determination) is a failure, the fluctuation time may be longer than the failure fluctuation time that can be selected. is suitable. In addition, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the jackpot fluctuation time that can be selected when the result of the first special symbol validity determination (first validity determination) is a jackpot in the low probability low base state (first gaming state). is suitable.

In addition, the jackpot fluctuation time (first specific The high-accuracy, low-base state is set during the period of variation) from when the high-accuracy, low-base state is set until a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, until the first variation display of the first special symbol is executed). A longer variation time may be selected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Thereby, even if a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol correctness determination early after setting a high-accuracy/low-base state, it is possible to secure as much as possible a period for acquiring gaming profits in a small-hit game.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the performance symbol display section are selected according to the game state as a special symbol (first special symbol or The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, by displaying the 1 performance symbol (3 digits) on the performance symbol display section and synchronizing it with either the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol according to the game state, it is synchronized with the 1st special symbol. and a case where it is synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol are displayed, the fluctuating display of the first performance symbol is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and the second performance symbol is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. In addition, when displaying both the first production symbol and the second production symbol, the production symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) that is set as the main character of the game in the gaming state is displayed in a large size (the main character). ), and the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (the other special pattern) that is not the main character of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first production symbol and the second production symbol all the time, depending on the gaming state and the game situation, there are cases where both the first production symbol and the second production symbol are displayed, and a case where the first production symbol and the second production symbol are displayed. There may be a case where one of the effect pattern and the second effect pattern (the main pattern) is displayed.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" which can be changed between a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter; The game apparatus may include a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entry hole is set in a state where a ball can be entered if the result of the first or second judgment is a win. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first mode. In addition, there is a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency (first gaming state), and a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than that in the game state. (second gaming state). Here, the "predetermined frequency" includes 0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is one, but the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is multiple times. It is also possible to have rounds with different numbers of openings. In addition, in this embodiment, the control process allows the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation to be changed simultaneously, but the control process allows the second special figure reservation to be given priority over the first special figure reservation. , a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure reservation is given priority to the second special figure reservation, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, priority is not set for extinguishing the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and among the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, they are consumed in order from the oldest memorized one. The control process may be a so-called control process for digesting pitches in order of arrival (order of memory).

In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), and has a specific area inside, and a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a grand prize opening that can change between a state in which the ball cannot enter and a state in which the ball cannot be entered. The game ball is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which a game ball enters a jackpot in a ball-enabled state and passes through a specific area, resulting in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and when the result of the judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a benefit, a high base state can be generated that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good too. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities are provided, and any one of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on. Good too.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, regarding the advance judgment based on the starting pitch, the latest obtained random number value (obtained information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read out, and the read obtained random number value (obtained information) is determined. (Prior judgment) (“Processing at the time of starting ball entry (S205)”; see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of preliminary judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage section, an area (obtained information storage means) that stores the obtained information that is subject to preliminary judgment (that is, the obtained information obtained based on the starting ball) may be stored in the main control section or the sub-control section. It may also be provided in the RAM of the unit to judge (preliminary judgment) the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary judgment storage part). In this case, by storing the results of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in a separate storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the preliminary determination may be made on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, you may make it pre-determine before storing acquired information in a special figure reservation storage part. In this case, there is no need to provide an area separate from the special figure reservation storage section to store acquired information that is subject to advance determination, and there is no need to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage section for advance determination. do not have.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.
(Reference invention 1)
Furthermore, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of ball entry is reduced in a low base state, and the frequency of ball entry is increased in a high base state. In some cases, when the base is low, players aim for the first starting port, and when the base is high, they aim for the second starting port. In addition, there have been gaming machines that perform so-called right-handed games in which players aim at the right side of the gaming area when playing a jackpot game or in a high base state. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, which adds sharpness to the game in an advantageous state. Met.

However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the various ball entrance openings are simply arranged in the right-handed hitting area, and it is difficult to say that the game can be played efficiently. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various ball entry holes at predetermined positions in a predetermined gaming area, we have made it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase gaming efficiency. Moreover, to provide a game machine that increases the interest in games.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A specific starting port into which game balls can enter,
a variable starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than in the first state;
a first variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entry enabled state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
specific identification information that is displayed variably based on the ball entering the specific starting port;
identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable starting port enters a second state when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
special game execution means for executing a special game in which, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, the first variable ball entry hole or the second variable ball entry hole is in a state where a ball can be entered;
This gaming machine is characterized in that a specific starting opening, a first variable ball entrance opening, a variable starting opening, and a second variable ball entrance opening are arranged in this order from the upstream side of the gaming area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific starting hole, a first variable ball entry hole, a variable starting hole, and a second variable ball entry hole are provided at predetermined locations in the gaming area, and these are provided at predetermined locations in the gaming area. A specific starting port, a first variable ball entry port, a variable starting port, and a second variable ball entry port are arranged in this order downstream from the starting port. This makes it possible to proceed with the game efficiently.

Specifically, in order to smoothly proceed with the game, it is first necessary to set the variable starting port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state), and the specific starting port related to this must be set to the second state (open state). Placed at the most upstream part of the ball mouth. This first increases the possibility that the variable starting port will be in the second state (open state). In addition, by using a gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that enters (passes through) the specific starting port continues to flow down the game area, subsequent games proceed smoothly. Further, by arranging the first variable ball entrance hole downstream of the specific starting hole, balls can be entered quickly when a special game is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable ball entry port upstream of the variable starting port, the game ball enters the variable starting port that is in the second state during a special game, and enters the first variable ball entry port. It is also possible to prevent a situation in which the entry of the ball is obstructed.

In addition, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable ball entry port, the variable starting port in the second state can be used as the variable starting port in the second state, except when the first variable ball entry port is in the state where the ball can enter in a special game. , it becomes possible to allow the flowing game ball to enter the ball with priority over other ball entry ports. This makes it possible to prevent as much as possible a situation where the ball does not enter the variable starting port even though the variable starting port is in the second state. In addition, by arranging the second variable ball entry hole downstream of the variable starting port, the game ball enters the second variable ball entry hole based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable starting port. The frequency will change, making it possible to add a variety of gameplay features. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay while providing smooth gameplay.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The special aspect has a first special aspect and a second special aspect,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
The first special game has more gaming profits that can be earned than the second special game,
The first variable ball entry opening is in a state in which a ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable ball entry opening is in a state in which a ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special mode and a second special mode as modes of stop display of the identification information for executing the special game, and the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as the special game. 2 special games. Then, the first special game is set as a special game in which the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the second special game, the first variable ball entry hole is set in a ball entry possible state (open state) in the first special game, and the second special game Now, the second variable ball entrance port is set to a state where a ball can enter.

Specifically, first, in order to bring the variable starting port into the second state (open state), the specific starting port is placed at the most upstream position among these ball entry ports. Next, by arranging the first variable ball entrance downstream of the specific starting opening, the ball can enter quickly when the first special game with a large gaming profit is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be collected in a short period of time. enable acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable ball entry port, the second state is variable, except when the first variable ball entry port is in the state where the ball can enter in a special game. It becomes possible to allow the game ball flowing down to enter the starting port with priority over other ball entry ports. In addition, the second variable ball entry hole, which allows ball entry in the second special game with a small gaming profit amount, is placed downstream of the variable starting hole, making it possible to add various gaming features. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay while providing smooth gameplay.

In addition, as the 1st special aspect and the 2nd special aspect, different stop symbols can be illustrated, for example. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games with different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, obtainable profit, variable ball entrance opening) can be exemplified.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. Equipped with a configurable game state setting means,
In the second gaming state, a game ball is entered into the variable starting port located upstream of the gaming area, and the game ball is entered into the second variable ball entering port located downstream of the variable starting port. By making it difficult to enter the ball,
The possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable starting port is low, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable starting port is higher than that of the first gaming state. When the variable starting port located on the upstream side enters the second state (open state), it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port located on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in the state where the ball can enter (open state) in the second special game, the second variable ball entrance is more active in the first game state than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the field is high. Moreover, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entrance depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3,
The gaming profit obtained by entering the second variable ball entry hole is greater than the gaming profit obtained by entering the ball into the variable starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming profit that can be earned when a game ball enters the ball (for example, the prize ball awarded when one game ball enters the ball) is transferred to the second ball from the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable ball entrances. As mentioned above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable starting port is difficult to enter the second state, the game ball flowing down is likely to enter the second variable ball entry port on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the variable starting port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable ball entry hole, where more gaming profits can be earned than the variable starting port, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first game state. , increase interest in games. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the obtainable gaming profits when the same second special game occurs in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, diversifying the gaming experience and increasing gaming interest. becomes.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4,
This game is characterized in that the game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, if the second special game becomes executable in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the second special game is executed in the first game state, so the second special game can be executed multiple times. By generating games, it becomes possible to obtain more gaming profits.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-5,
The first special game is a jackpot game, and the second special game is a small win game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a jackpot game, and the second special game is a small win game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-6,
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
and first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port,
The present invention is characterized in that the first identification information and the identification information can be displayed variably in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are displayed in parallel. (at the same time) variable display is possible. As a result, in a simultaneous variable gaming machine (simultaneous variable machine) that can display the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (at the same time), it is possible to diversify the gameplay while providing smooth gameplay. do.

According to the game machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the interest in the game while making it possible to proceed with the game smoothly.

(Reference invention 2)
Furthermore, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), there are a plurality of gaming states, and when a jackpot game is executed, the normal state changes to a variable probability state or a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. It has become a gaming machine that is transitioning. Further, in an advantageous state, if the next jackpot game does not occur while the symbols are displayed in a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the game returns to the normal state. Such gaming machines have a certain effect of preventing players from getting bored with the game by changing the gaming state.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machines, the mode of transition of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been increased. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the gameplay and increases the interest in the game by giving characteristics to the transition mode of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
a first variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entry enabled state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entry hole or the second variable ball entry hole becomes available for ball entry. A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result. A gaming machine,
The identification result includes a first identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and first gaming state.

Such a gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means that can set a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability and second gaming state, in the high probability and second gaming state, the number of times that the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed is changed. When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
The identification result has a second identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of displays reaches the specific number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. , by executing a common performance, it is made difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a predetermined probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set to the second gaming state with the predetermined probability. When the number of times of the variable display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a predetermined probability to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) between the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and second gaming state or a high probability and second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game. In addition, this allows players to expect that the game state will change to the second game state with a high probability when a specific number of times has passed during the execution of a common performance, thereby increasing their interest in the game. .

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The game is characterized in that more gaming profits can be obtained in the first gaming state with the high probability than in the second gaming state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state with a high probability is a gaming state in which more gaming profits can be earned than the second gaming state with a high probability. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specified number of times passes, increasing his interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and second gaming state, a game ball is entered into the second starting port located upstream of the gaming area, and the second starting port is located downstream of the second starting port. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the variable ball entry hole, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry hole when the second special game occurs is reduced to the high probability and the second This game is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side enters the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port disposed on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entry opening enters the ball entering state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is higher in the first game state than in the second game state with higher probability. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entry opening is high. Moreover, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entrance depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game allows the game state to be changed after the first special game ends,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable ball entrance opening is in a state where a ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance opening is in a state where a ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered allows the game state to be changed after the first special game ends. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are made the same gaming state. As a result, when the high probability and first gaming state is reached, the high probability and first gaming state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and first gaming state, so the second special game can be played multiple times. By generating this, it becomes possible to obtain more gaming profits.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the interest in gaming.

(Reference invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
a first variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entry enabled state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entry hole or the second variable ball entry hole becomes available for ball entry. A game execution means,
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result;
A gaming machine comprising: a firing device that fires a game ball into a gaming area with a predetermined firing intensity;
The first starting port is provided in a first game area into which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port is provided in a second game area into which a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter,
The identification result includes a first identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of displays reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and first gaming state,
does not have the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port;
It is characterized by having the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

Such a gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means that can set a predetermined probability and a high probability. Further, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can enter with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can enter with the second firing intensity. . Then, when the first specific result is reached, if the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability and second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and second gaming state. When the number of variable displays of , reaches a specific number of times, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game. Moreover, the first identification result is not included as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, and the first identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. As a result, different gameplay can be provided depending on whether a game ball is entered into the first starting port or a game ball is entered into the second starting port, diversifying the gaming experience and increasing the enjoyment of the game. It is possible to increase it.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
The identification result has a second identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of displays reaches the specific number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. , by executing a common performance, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state,
The invention is characterized in that the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a predetermined probability, the number of times the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed fluctuating at the predetermined probability and in the second gaming state is When a specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a predetermined probability to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) between the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and second gaming state or a high probability and second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game. In addition, this allows players to expect that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when a certain number of times has passed during the execution of a common performance, thereby increasing their interest in the game. .

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
The identification result has a third identification result,
When the third specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and first gaming state, and the gaming state does not change in the gaming state until the next specific result is reached. It is said that
The third identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. If the third specific result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, the gaming state is maintained in the first gaming state with a high probability until the next specific result is achieved. It is assumed that Thereby, as a result of the fluctuation display of the first identification information, there is no change from the second gaming state with high probability to the first gaming state based on the specific number of fluctuation displays, and the special game ends. It has something that guarantees the gaming state of the first gaming state with high probability until the next specified result is reached. Furthermore, in a game involving a variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, and it is also possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3,
The game is characterized in that more gaming profits can be obtained in the first gaming state with high probability than in the second gaming state with high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state with a high probability is a gaming state in which more gaming profits can be earned than the second gaming state with a high probability. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specified number of times passes, increasing his interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and second gaming state, a game ball is entered into the second starting port located upstream of the gaming area, and the second starting port is located downstream of the second starting port. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the variable ball entry hole, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry hole when the second special game occurs is reduced to the high probability and the second This game is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side enters the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port disposed on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entry opening enters the ball entering state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is higher in the first game state than in the second game state with higher probability. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entry opening is high. Moreover, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entrance depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-5,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game allows the game state to be changed after the first special game ends,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable ball entry opening is in a state in which a ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable ball entry opening is in a state in which a ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered allows the game state to be changed after the first special game ends. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are made the same gaming state. As a result, when the high probability and first gaming state is reached, the high probability and first gaming state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and first gaming state, so the second special game can be played multiple times. By generating this, it becomes possible to obtain more gaming profits.

According to the game machine of Reference Invention 3, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
a first variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entry enabled state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entry hole or the second variable ball entry hole becomes available for ball entry. A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result. A gaming machine,
The identification result includes a first identification result and a fourth identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of displays reaches a first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and first gaming state,
When the fourth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches a second number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and first gaming state.

Such a gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means that can set a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the first identification result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability and second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. In addition, when the fourth identification result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability and second gaming state, in the high probability and second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. This makes it possible to maintain gaming interest for a long period of time by diversifying the timing of changes in gaming status. This also makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this aspect, when the number of times that the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed in a variable manner reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state is changed from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and second gaming state. 1 game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times the first identification information is displayed as a change, when the number of times the second identification information is displayed as a change becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state with high probability. It may be possible to change from the state to the first gaming state with high probability. In addition, as another aspect, irrespective of the number of times the second identification information is displayed as a change, when the number of times the first identification information is displayed as a change becomes the first number or the second number, the game state is changed to the second game with high probability. It may be possible to change from the state to the first gaming state with high probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The identification result includes a second identification result and a fifth identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of displays reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the fifth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of displays reaches the second number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. , by executing a common performance, it is made difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second identification result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a predetermined probability, the first When the number of variable displays of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a predetermined probability to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the fifth identification result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a predetermined probability to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) between the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and second gaming state or a high probability and second gaming state. This makes it possible to maintain gaming interest for a long period of time by diversifying the timing of changes in gaming status. This also makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game. In addition, as a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times and the second number of times have passed during the execution of the common performance, It becomes possible to increase interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The second number of times is a larger number than the first number of times,
The gaming state is more likely to change to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes during the second number of times than when the gaming state changes during the first number of times. This is a characteristic feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the gaming state changes at the second number of times than at the first number of times. The probability is high and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state is high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the gaming state will be maintained without changing, and the player reaches the second number of times while the gaming state remains in the second gaming state. In this case, the player plays the game with high expectations for changing to the first game state with high probability. This has the advantage of increasing expectations for a plurality of games in the second gaming state. This also makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The second number of times is a larger number than the first number of times,
The gaming state is more likely to change to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes during the first number of times than when the gaming state changes during the second number of times. This is a characteristic feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the gaming state changes at the first number of times than at the second number of times. The probability is high and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state is high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the gaming state will change, and when the player reaches the second number of times while the gaming state remains in the second gaming state, the player plays the game expecting that the gaming state will change when the first number of times is reached. Although the probability is lower than the first time, the player plays the game with a high probability of changing to the first game state. This has the advantage of increasing expectations for a plurality of games in the second gaming state. This also makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4,
The game is characterized in that more gaming profits can be obtained in the first gaming state with high probability than in the second gaming state with high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state with a high probability is a gaming state in which more gaming profits can be earned than the second gaming state with a high probability. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specified number of times passes, increasing his interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-5,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and second gaming state, a game ball is entered into the second starting port located upstream of the gaming area, and the second starting port is located downstream of the second starting port. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the variable ball entry hole, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry hole when the second special game occurs is reduced to the high probability and the second This game is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side enters the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port disposed on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entry opening enters the ball entering state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is higher in the first game state than in the second game state with higher probability. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entry opening is high. Moreover, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entrance depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game allows the game state to be changed after the first special game ends,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable ball entry opening is in a state in which a ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable ball entry opening is in a state in which a ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered allows the game state to be changed after the first special game ends. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entry opening is set in a state where balls can be entered does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are made the same gaming state. As a result, when the high probability and first gaming state is reached, the high probability and first gaming state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and first gaming state, so the second special game can be played multiple times. By generating this, it becomes possible to obtain more gaming profits.

According to the game machine of Reference Invention 4, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 5)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
a first variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entry enabled state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entry hole or the second variable ball entry hole becomes available for ball entry. A game execution means,
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result;
a first condition state in which a time period for fluctuating display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; and a second condition state in which a time period for fluctuating display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A gaming machine comprising a second identification information variation time determining means that can set a second identification information variation time,
The second condition state is such that the average time of the determined variable display of the second identification information is shorter than the first condition state,
The gaming states include the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, the predetermined probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state, and the high probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state. The game is characterized in that it has two conditional states, the high probability and the second gaming state, and the second conditional state.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means can set the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the probability setting means can set the predetermined probability and the high probability, and the first condition state and the second gaming state can be set. and a second conditional state in which the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information is shorter than the first conditional state. In addition, the gaming states include a predetermined probability, a first gaming state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability, a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability, a first gaming state and a second condition state, and a high probability. and a second gaming state and a second condition state, and in the gaming state where the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition state is set to a relatively long time. In the game state where the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming conditions, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is a specific result. It is characterized by:

According to such a gaming machine, the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the gaming profit obtained by a special game that is executed with a specific result, increase the possibility that it will increase, or increase the possibility that the special game will be in an advantageous state after the special game ends. be. As a result, the player expects that the second condition state will be set, in which the second identification information can be displayed in a large number of variations, that is, the time for the variation display of the second identification information to be relatively short. Then, the game will be played. Furthermore, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, making it possible to diversify the gaming states, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
Equipped with a third starting port into which game balls can enter,
The second identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the ball entering the third starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the third starting port is provided in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the entry of the game ball. Thereby, the second identification information is displayed variably when the ball enters either the variable second starting port or the third variable starting port, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
Equipped with a firing device that fires game balls into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area into which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second variable ball entry port are used for a second game in which game balls fired at the second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. established in the area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, play the game by firing a gaming ball into the first gaming area to display the first identification information in a variable manner. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state. In the 2-condition state, the second identification information is variably displayed by firing a game ball into the second game area to play the game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can enter with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable ball entering port, and the second variable ball entering port are provided. , is provided in a second game area where balls can be entered at a second firing intensity. When the gaming state is the first gaming state and the first condition state with a predetermined probability, a game is played by firing a gaming ball into the first gaming area and displaying the first identification information in a variable manner. In addition, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game is played by shooting a game ball into the second game area and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired into the first game area and the first identification information is displayed variably to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is fired into the second game area. The game is played by firing the button and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

This makes it possible to diversify the gaming conditions, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, if it is more advantageous for the player to display the second identification information in a variable manner, the player may play the game with the expectation that a second condition state will be set that will cause the second identification information to be displayed in a variable manner. Become. Furthermore, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, making it possible to diversify the gaming states, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3,
Equipped with a firing device that fires game balls into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area into which a gaming ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second variable ball entry port allow game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity to enter. provided in a possible second gaming area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, play the game by firing a gaming ball into the first gaming area to display the first identification information in a variable manner. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. In the 2-condition state, the second identification information is variably displayed by firing a game ball into the second game area to play the game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can enter with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entering port, and the second The variable ball entrance opening is provided in the second game area where the ball can enter at the second firing intensity. When the gaming state is the first gaming state and the first condition state with a predetermined probability, a game is played by firing a gaming ball into the first gaming area and displaying the first identification information in a variable manner. In addition, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game is played by shooting a game ball into the second game area and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired into the first game area and the first identification information is displayed variably to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is fired into the second game area. The game is played by firing the button and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

This makes it possible to diversify the gaming conditions, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, if it is more advantageous for the player to display the second identification information in a variable manner, the player may play the game with the expectation that a second condition state will be set that will cause the second identification information to be displayed in a variable manner. Become. Furthermore, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, making it possible to diversify the gaming states, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-5,
The gaming profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state than in the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state and the second conditional state with a high probability are the gaming states in which the obtainable gaming profit is larger than the second gaming state and the second conditional state with a high probability. There is. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the game state will be set to the first game state and the second condition state with a high probability, thereby increasing his interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-6,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state, a game ball is entered into the second starting port disposed upstream of the second gaming area, and the ball enters the second starting port. By making it difficult for a ball to enter the second variable ball entry hole disposed on the downstream side, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry hole is reduced to the high probability and the second game ball entrance. The high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state are set higher than the state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side enters the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port disposed on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entry opening enters the ball entry possible state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability, first game state, and second condition state are higher probability and the second It is assumed that the frequency of entry of game balls into the second variable ball entry opening is higher than in the gaming state and the second condition state. Moreover, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entrance depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the interest in gaming.

(Reference invention 6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
a first variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entry opening that can be changed between a ball entry enabled state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry disabled state in which a game ball cannot enter;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entry hole or the second variable ball entry hole becomes available for ball entry. A game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result. A gaming machine,
The gaming states include the first gaming state with the predetermined probability, the second gaming state with the predetermined probability, the first gaming state with the high probability, and the second gaming state with the high probability. death,
The second variable ball entry opening is characterized in that when the gaming state reaches the high probability and the first gaming state, the frequency of entry of game balls increases.

Such a gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means that can set a predetermined probability and a high probability. In addition, the game state includes a first game state with a predetermined probability, a second game state with a predetermined probability, a first game state with a high probability, and a second game state with a high probability. It is assumed that when the probability is high and the first game state is reached, the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entry hole becomes high. As a result, the player plays the game with high probability and with the expectation that the first game state will occur. Moreover, this makes it possible to diversify the gaming conditions, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
Equipped with a firing device that fires game balls into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area into which a gaming ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second variable ball entry port are a second game area into which game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. established in
When the gaming state has the predetermined probability and is in the first gaming state, play a game by displaying the first identification information in a variable manner by firing a gaming ball into the first gaming area;
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, a game ball is fired into the second gaming area. A gaming machine that plays a game by displaying the second identification information in a variable manner,
In a gaming state in which a game is played by displaying the second identification information in a variable manner by firing a game ball into the second gaming area,
The frequency of entry of game balls into the second variable ball entry opening is higher than that in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state. It is characterized by being higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can enter with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable ball entering port, and the second variable ball entering port are provided. , is provided in a second game area where balls can be entered at a second firing intensity. When the game state is the first game state with a predetermined probability, the game is played by firing a game ball into the first game area and displaying the first identification information in a variable manner. Also, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and second gaming state, a high probability and first gaming state, or a high probability and second gaming state, the game ball is fired into the second gaming area and the second identification information is transmitted. The game is played with a variable display. Furthermore, in a game state in which a game is played by firing a game ball into the second game area, that is, a second game state with a predetermined probability, a first game state with a high probability, and a second game state with a high probability, The game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable ball entry hole is highest is set as the high probability and first game state.

As a result, when the player enters a game state in which he plays a game by firing a game ball into the second game area, he proceeds with the game with the expectation that the game state will be the first game state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming conditions, diversify the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and second gaming state, a game ball is entered into the second starting port located upstream of the gaming area, and the second starting port is located downstream of the second starting port. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the variable ball entry hole, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable ball entry hole when the second special game occurs is reduced to the high probability and the second This game is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side enters the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port disposed on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entry opening enters the ball entering state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is higher in the first game state than in the second game state with higher probability. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entry opening is high. Moreover, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of balls entering the second variable ball entrance depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

According to the game machine of Reference Invention 6, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 7)
In conventional gaming machines, based on the ball entering the starting hole, a win/fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. , there was one in which a jackpot game was executed in which a jackpot was opened. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that set a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a high base state, after the end of a jackpot game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In addition, the high base state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is a high base state in which the ball enters the starting hole more frequently than the low base state, and this high base state is a high base state that is set after the end of the jackpot game. When the number of times reached a predetermined number, it was designed to shift to a low base state.

In conventional gaming machines as described above, in a high base state, the speed at which the game balls in possession decreases can be reduced while playing the game, allowing the player to play with a sense of security until the next jackpot game. can. On the other hand, if the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number in the high base state, the high base state ends, and the state shifts to the low base state, there is a risk that the game interest will decrease. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can diversify the transition mode of gaming states and execute game performances that increase gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A specific starting port into which game balls can enter, and (normal starting port)
A variable starting port that can be changed into a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering the ball is higher than the first mode, (Special 2 starting port)
Specific identification information display means that variably displays specific identification information (normal symbol) based on the ball entering the specific starting port;
determining means for making a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the variable starting port;
identification information display means that variably displays identification information (special design) based on the determination result of the determination means;
a jackpot game execution means that executes a jackpot game when the judgment result of the judgment means is a jackpot;
a small winning game execution means for executing a small winning game when the determination result of the determining means is a small winning;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the determination result of the determination means will be the first specific result;
Equipped with
The gaming state includes the high probability and the first gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state,
The gaming state of the high probability and the first technique state is such that the execution frequency of the small winning game is set higher than the gaming state of the high probability and the second gaming state. The gaming state is considered to be more advantageous to the player than the gaming state of the gaming state,
When the gaming state is the high probability and the second gaming state, when the variable display of the specific identification information is executed a specific number of times, the gaming state shifts to the high probability and the first gaming state. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific identification information display means variably displays the specific identification information based on the ball entering the specific starting port, and the identification information display unit variably displaying the specific identification information based on the ball entering the variable starting port. Information display means. Moreover, it has a jackpot game and a small win game, and has a first game state and a second game state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable starting hole is different, and has a predetermined probability and a high probability as the determination probability of the determination means. The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state with high probability and a second gaming state with high probability. Furthermore, by varying the execution frequency of the small winning game depending on the gaming state, the first gaming state with a high probability is made to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state with a high probability. Then, the gaming state of the high probability and second gaming state is shifted to the high probability and first gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the number of times of fluctuation display of the specific identification information becomes a specific number of times.

As a result, the gaming state with high probability and the second gaming state changes to the gaming state with high probability and the first gaming state in which the small winning game is executed frequently based on the number of times the specific identification information is changed and displayed. Players become more interested in changes in gaming conditions. In addition, since the game state changes, the frequency of execution of the small winning game increases, so that the player becomes more interested in the game.

In addition, unlike conventional gaming machines, the gaming state does not change depending on the number of times the identification information is displayed, but the gaming state changes depending on the number of times the specific identification information is displayed. It is difficult to predict the situation, and the user is surprised when the game state changes at an unexpected timing, which increases interest. In addition, the frequency of execution of the small winning game increases at an unexpected timing, and the player is excited to be in a gaming state in which he can win more benefits (prize balls) than before, which increases his interest.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The probability setting means sets the probability to the predetermined probability when the variable display of the identification information is performed a special number of times at the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is executed a specific number of times in a high probability gaming state, a predetermined probability is set. As a result, in a gaming state where the gaming state is a high probability and a second gaming state, when the number of times the identification information fluctuates and is displayed becomes a special number, the high probability becomes a predetermined probability, and when the number of times that the specific identification information fluctuates and is displayed reaches a specific number, the second Change the gaming state to the first gaming state. Furthermore, this allows the manner and timing of changes in the game state to be diversified, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in a game state where the game state is a high probability and a second game state, when the number of times the identification information is displayed as a variation becomes a special number, the high probability becomes a predetermined probability, and when the number of times the number of changes and display of the specific identification information becomes a specific number, the second game is started. In order to change the state to the first gaming state, depending on the variation time of the identification information and the variation time of the specific identification information, it is possible to change from a high probability and second gaming state to a predetermined probability and second gaming state, or a high probability and second gaming state. The state changes to a first gaming state with a high probability, or changes to a first gaming state with a predetermined probability. Further, the timing of this change also varies depending on the variation time of the identification information and the variation time of the specific identification information. This also diversifies the gameplay and increases the interest in the game.

Further, the variable display time of the identification information may include at least a first special time and a second special time that is longer than the first special time. As a result, if many long variable times are selected, a high probability gaming state will be a long time, and if many short variable times are selected, a high probability gaming state will be a short time. Therefore, the more long fluctuation times are selected and the longer the high probability gaming state becomes, the more the specific identification information fluctuation display number reaches the specific number of times during that time, and the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state. , the probability of shifting to the first gaming state is high and is advantageous to the player. Further, as a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that a long time will be selected as the variation time of the identification information (special symbol) in the second gaming state with a high probability. In addition, when the identification information changes for a long time, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation display will have a higher jackpot reliability than when the identification information changes for a short time, so the game becomes more interesting in this respect as well.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
The fluctuation time of the specific identification information in the gaming state of the high probability and the second gaming state includes a first specific time and a second specific time that is longer than the first specific time. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, the first specific time and the second specific time have different lengths as the high probability variation time of the specific identification information in the second gaming state. As a result, the specific identification information selected in the game state with high probability and the second gaming state has different lengths of fluctuation time, so that the second gaming state with high probability is selected with high probability and The timing of changing to the first gaming state is diversified. Furthermore, this makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the gaming state changes, making it possible to diversify the gameplay.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-3,
A first specific condition state in which the variation time of the specific identification information is determined based on a first specific condition, and a second specific condition state in which the variation time of the specific identification information is determined based on a second specific condition are set. Equipped with means for determining possible specific identification information fluctuation time,
The gaming state includes the high probability, the second gaming state, and the first specific condition state, and the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second specific condition state,
The high probability, the second gaming state, and the second specific condition state have a higher average time of fluctuation time of the specific identification information determined than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the first specific condition state. It is characterized by being short.

According to such a gaming machine, there is provided a specific identification information variation time determining means that can set a first specific condition state and a second specific condition state as conditions for determining the specific identification information variation time. Furthermore, the gaming states include a high probability, second gaming state, and first specific condition state, and a high probability, second gaming state, and second specific condition state. When the gaming state has a high probability, is in the second gaming state, and is in the second specific condition state, the average time of the fluctuation time of the specific identification information is longer than when the gaming state has high probability, the second gaming state, and the first specific condition state. shall be shorter.

Also, as a result, even if the probability is high and the second gaming state is present, depending on whether the condition that determines the variation time of the specific identification information at that time is the first specific condition state or the second specific condition state, The timing of changing from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state will be different. Furthermore, this makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the gaming state changes, making it possible to diversify the gameplay.

Further, the variation time of the identification information is determined based on a first special condition (first condition), and the variation time of the identification information is determined based on a second special condition (second condition). a second special condition state (second condition state) determined based on the condition);
The gaming states include the high probability, the second gaming state, and the first special condition state (the high probability, the second gaming state, and the first condition state), and the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second special condition state. a special condition state (the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state);
The high probability, the second gaming state, and the second special condition state have a shorter average time of fluctuation time of the determined identification information than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the first special condition state. It may have a configuration.
*Also, the gaming states include the high probability, the second gaming state, the first special condition state, and the first specific condition state, and the high probability, the second gaming state, the first special condition state, and the second specific condition. the high probability, the second gaming state, the second special condition state, and the first specific condition state; and the high probability, the second gaming state, the second special condition state, and the second specific condition state. It is also possible to have one.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state and executes a gaming performance that increases gaming interest.

(Reference invention 8)
In conventional gaming machines, based on the ball entering the starting hole, a win/fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. There was a game in which a jackpot game was executed in which a jackpot was opened (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583). Furthermore, some gaming machines set a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a high base state, after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a high base state that is set after the end of a jackpot game, will shift to another gaming state when the number of fluctuating displays of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times or when a jackpot occurs. It was said that it was possible to do so.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to reduce the rate of decrease in the number of game balls in the player's possession, so the player can play with a sense of security until the next jackpot game. It can be carried out. On the other hand, if the next jackpot occurs immediately after an advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state will end immediately, and the player will not be able to fully play the game in the advantageous gaming state. There was a risk that interest in gaming would decline. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is intended to provide a gaming machine that can lengthen the execution period of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and increase the player's interest in playing the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
a first win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a second win/fail determination that is capable of executing a jackpot determination to determine whether or not it is a jackpot and a small hit determination to determine whether or not it is a small hit based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first validity determination;
a second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second validity determination;
a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game when the result of the first judgment or the second judgment is a jackpot;
a small winning game execution means that executes a small winning game when the result of the second validity determination is a small winning;
Equipped with
A gaming machine capable of displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel in a variable manner,
having a first specific fluctuation period that is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first validity determination;
If the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, making it impossible to perform a new first validity determination;
If the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the jackpot determination is made impossible, and a second win/fail determination is performed in which the small hit determination is executed. That is.

According to such a gaming machine, there is a first win/fail determination that can execute a jackpot determination to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot determination to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and a small hit determination to determine whether or not it is a small win. an executable second validity determination, first identification information that is variably displayed based on the determination result of the first validity determination, and second identification information that is variably displayed based on the determination result of the second validity determination. can be displayed in parallel. In addition, in the first specific fluctuation period that is the period of fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of jackpot in the first judgment, a new first judgment is made impossible, and the jackpot judgment is made impossible. In addition, the second correctness judgment that can perform the small hit judgment is made executable. As a result, the result of the first judgment becomes a jackpot, and even while the first identification information related to the jackpot is being displayed, a small hit can be generated in the judgment of the second identification information, and gaming profits can be earned. . Moreover, this makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the first win/fail determination was defined as "a first win/fail determination that can perform a jackpot determination to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the ball entering the first starting port." It is sufficient to have both a jackpot determination and a small hit determination.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The present invention is characterized in that the second validity determination can be performed a plurality of times during the first specific fluctuation period.

According to such a gaming machine, during the first specific fluctuation period, which is a period of fluctuating display of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first determination, the second determination can be performed multiple times. It is a long period of time. As a result, the result of the first judgment becomes a jackpot, and even while the first identification information related to the jackpot is being displayed, the second judgment is executed multiple times, and a small hit is determined in the judgment of the second identification information. It becomes possible to generate gaming profits. This also makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
The jackpot game is characterized in that more gaming profits can be obtained than the small win game.

According to such a gaming machine, the amount of gaming profits that can be obtained through jackpot games is greater than the amount of gaming profits that can be acquired through small winning games. As a result, it is possible to obtain a smaller amount of gaming profit by playing a small winning game than by playing a jackpot game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-3,
The second starting port is a variable starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state,
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the variable starting port is higher than the first gaming state. configurable game state setting means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the first validity determination or the second validity determination is determined to be a jackpot;
The gaming state includes a first gaming state with a predetermined probability, a first gaming state with a high probability, and a second gaming state with a high probability,
The high probability and the first gaming state can be set as a gaming state in which the small winning game can be generated and a gaming profit can be obtained by the second judgment of validity, and the high probability and the second gaming state and the predetermined a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in terms of probability;
The variation time of the first identification information includes a first variation time and a second variation time longer than the first variation time,
The first specific fluctuation period is the second fluctuation time,
When the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state, if the first judgment determines that it is a jackpot, the second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information, and the second variation The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform the second validity determination a plurality of times in a given period of time.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming states include a first gaming state with a predetermined probability, a first gaming state with a high probability, and a second gaming state with a high probability, and a first gaming state with a high probability. The state is a gaming state that has a high probability and is more advantageous than the second gaming state, and is a gaming state that has a predetermined probability and is more gaming than the first gaming state. Further, when the gaming state is high probability and the first gaming state, when a jackpot is determined in the first judgment, a second variation time having a long variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information related to the jackpot. Then, during the second variable time period, the second validity determination can be performed a plurality of times.

As a result, when the high probability and first gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the result of the first win/fail determination becomes a jackpot, and even while the first identification information related to the jackpot is being displayed fluctuating, the second The second validity determination is executed a plurality of times, and a small win is generated in the validity determination of the second identification information, thereby making it possible to obtain a gaming profit. In addition, as a result, a high probability and first gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, and even if the result of the first win/fail determination is a jackpot, a long period of time is ensured for displaying the fluctuation of the first identification information related to the jackpot. However, it is possible to secure as much as possible the execution period of the second judgment of validity in the first gaming state with high probability, that is, the execution period of the small winning game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4,
When the high probability and first gaming state is set as the gaming state, in the high probability and first gaming state, until the first validity determination and/or the second validity determination is executed a specific number of times. The second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information when a jackpot is determined in the first validity determination.

According to such a gaming machine, after the gaming state is set with a high probability and the first gaming state is set, until the first correctness judgment and/or the second judgment is executed a specific number of times, the first judgment is made. When it is determined that it is a jackpot, the second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information. According to this, when the gaming state has a high probability and the result of the first win/fail determination becomes a jackpot within a short period of time after the first gaming state is set, the second variation time of the long variation time is used as the variation time of the jackpot. You will have to choose. Furthermore, even if the gaming state has a high probability and the conditions that allow the gaming state to end in a short period of time after the first gaming state is set are satisfied, the fluctuation display time of the first identification information related to the jackpot will be extended. It becomes possible to secure the time and to secure as much as possible the execution period of the second judgment of validity in the first gaming state with high probability, that is, the execution period of the small winning game.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that increases the player's interest in gaming by increasing the execution period of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

(Reference invention 9)

Furthermore, Reference Invention 9 provides a gaming machine that can increase the player's sense of security regarding the execution of advantageous gaming conditions and increase his or her interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
a first acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port, with a first number as an upper limit;
a second acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port, with a second number as an upper limit;
a first win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means;
a second win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot and a small hit determination for determining whether or not it is a small win based on the acquired information stored in the second acquired information storage means;
a first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first validity determination;
a second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second validity determination;
a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game when the result of the first judgment or the second judgment is a jackpot;
a small winning game execution means that executes a small winning game when the result of the second validity determination is a small winning;
Equipped with
A gaming machine capable of displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel in a variable manner,
As a game area, it has a first game area and a second game area,
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area, the second starting port is provided in the second gaming area,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state, a game based on the first judgment is executed by firing a game ball into the first gaming area;
When the gaming state is the second gaming state, a game mainly based on the second judgment is executed by firing a game ball into the second gaming area,
As the time of the fluctuation display of the first identification information that is executed when the result of the first validity determination is negative, a first failure fluctuation time and a second failure fluctuation time that is longer than the first failure fluctuation time are defined. have,
During the period from when the second gaming state is set until when the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is incorrect. In this case, the first deviation variation time is selected as the time for displaying the variation of the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Moreover, the deviation fluctuation time of the first identification information when the result of the first validity determination is negative includes a first deviation fluctuation time of a relatively short time and a second deviation fluctuation time of a relatively long time. Then, during the period from when the second gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the first identification information fluctuation display is executed the first time, if the result of the first validity determination is incorrect, the corresponding A relatively short first deviation fluctuation time is selected as the first identification information fluctuation display time.

If you hit a jackpot in the first gaming state and move to the second gaming state with the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the shot is fired into the second gaming area and a second win/fail judgment is performed. Even though the main game is executed, the first validity determination is executed immediately after the transition to the second gaming state. Even in such a case, according to the configuration of the present invention, after the transition to the second gaming state, a short variation time is selected as the error variation time of the first identification information based on the first validity determination. , it becomes possible to digest the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means as quickly as possible. As a result, after the start of the second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming state may end is ended early by executing the first validity judgment, thereby giving a sense of security to subsequent games. becomes possible.

It should be noted that the results of the second correctness determination include a jackpot, a small hit, and a miss. Further, although it is assumed that there is a jackpot and a miss as a result of the first judgment, it is sufficient that the result includes at least a jackpot and a miss, and may include a jackpot, a small hit, and a miss.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
In a period after the second gaming state is set and after the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first number of times, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is incorrect. In this case, the second deviation variation time is selected as the time for displaying the variation of the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period from the start of the second gaming state until the variable display of the first identification information is performed the first number of times, the first validity determination is performed in the second gaming state. A short variation time is selected as the deviation variation time of the first identification information based on the first validity determination of the case. On the other hand, during the period after the start of the second gaming state and after the variable display of the first identification information has been executed the first time, for example, if a game ball is accidentally launched into the first gaming area and the When the first validity determination is executed, a long variation time is selected as the deviation fluctuation time of the first identification information based on the first validity determination. As a result, the execution period of the first validity determination that inevitably occurs immediately after the start of the second gaming state can be quickly ended, and the execution period of the first validity determination that occurs unintentionally and accidentally after the first identification information has been executed the first time can be quickly terminated. The execution period of the first validity determination, which occurs during the period of time, is a long period of variable time, making it possible to prevent the second gaming state from ending due to the first validity determination as much as possible.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2,
The first number and the first number of times are the same value.

According to such a gaming machine, the first number, which is the upper limit number of pieces of acquired information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means, and the first lost fluctuation time, which is a short time, as the lost fluctuation time of the first identification information. The first number of times (the number of fluctuating displays of the first identification information after the second gaming state is set), which is the selected period, is set to the same value (for example, both are set to "4"). As a result, even if the second gaming state is started with the first number of pieces of acquired information, which is the upper limit, stored in the first acquired information storage means, the first number of pieces of acquired information, which is the upper limit value, is stored in the first acquired information storage means. It becomes possible to digest the acquired information as quickly as possible. As a result, after the start of the second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming state may end is ended early by executing the first validity judgment, thereby giving a sense of security to subsequent games. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 to Reference Invention 9-3,
having a first specific fluctuation period that is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first validity determination;
If the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, making it impossible to perform a new first validity determination;
If the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the jackpot determination is made impossible and a second win/fail determination is performed in which the small hit determination is executed. That is.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first win/fail judgment is executed and a jackpot is achieved, the first specific fluctuation period is executed as the fluctuation display time of the first identification information related to the jackpot. Further, during execution of the first specific fluctuation period, execution of a new first validity determination is disabled, and when the ball enters the second starting hole, a second second validity determination is executed. This second second validity determination is a validity determination in which a small hit determination is performed without performing a jackpot determination. As a result, even if the first judgment is executed in the second gaming state and results in a jackpot, the second judgment is executed during the first specific fluctuation period of the first identification information related to the jackpot. This makes it possible to increase gaming profits by generating small winning games.

In the second gaming state, when the first win/fail judgment is executed and a jackpot is achieved, and the first specific variation period is executed, if the ball enters the first starting hole during the first specific variation period, Execution of a new first validity determination is disabled. In addition, in the first specific fluctuation period, when the ball enters the second starting port, a second second win/fail determination is performed that "disables the execution of the jackpot determination and executes the small hit determination." shall be. Further, the second validity determination performed during a period other than when the first identification information is displaying the jackpot fluctuation, that is, the determination of the jackpot determination and the small hit determination, is also referred to as the first second validity determination.

Further, it is desirable that the first specific fluctuation period be a relatively long fluctuation time. For example, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time to be longer than the loss fluctuation time (all loss fluctuation times) when the result of the first validity determination is a loss in the second gaming state. Further, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time to be longer than the jackpot fluctuation time (all jackpot fluctuation times) when the result of the first win/fail determination is a jackpot in the first gaming state. Further, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time to be longer than the jackpot fluctuation time (all jackpot fluctuation times) when the result of the second win/fail determination is a jackpot in the second gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to execute the second judgment as many times as possible during the execution of the first specific fluctuation period, and by executing the small winning game, it is possible to increase and obtain as much gaming profit as possible. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

As a result, even if the result of the first judgment becomes a jackpot and the second gaming state ends, the second gaming state (period in which gaming profits can be earned through small winning games) continues as long as possible. , it becomes possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming. In addition, in the second gaming state, if the first judgment is executed and the result of the first judgment is a jackpot and a jackpot game is executed, the execution of the jackpot game changes the second gaming state. It will end once. After the jackpot game ends, the second gaming state (for example, high probability low base state) may be executed again, or the first gaming state (for example, low probability base state) which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state may be executed again. In some cases, a third gaming state (for example, a low probability and high base state) that is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state is set; A fourth gaming state (for example, a high probability high base state) that is more disadvantageous than the current state may be set.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4,
The first specific fluctuation period is a jackpot fluctuation time that is longer than the second loss fluctuation time,
During the period from when the second gaming state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is a jackpot. In this case, the first specific variation period is selected as the time for displaying the variation of the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the first specific fluctuation period is a longer fluctuation time than the second loss fluctuation time, which is a relatively long loss fluctuation time. In addition, if the result of the first win/fail determination is a jackpot during the period from when the second gaming state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first time, the first identification related to the jackpot A first specific fluctuation period is selected as the information fluctuation display time. As a result, in a relatively short period of time from when the second gaming state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first time, the first judgment is executed and a jackpot is achieved. In this case, it becomes possible to execute a first specific fluctuation period with a relatively long fluctuation time as the fluctuation display time of the jackpot. In addition, this prevents the second gaming state from ending in a very short period of time, and even if the result of the first win/fail judgment becomes a jackpot within a short period of time after starting the second gaming state. During the execution of the first specific fluctuation period, it is possible to increase the gaming profit by executing the second validity judgment and generating a small winning game. Moreover, this makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that increases a player's sense of security regarding execution of an advantageous gaming state and increases his/her interest in gaming.

In addition, any one or more of the above-mentioned Reference Inventions 1 to 9 may be combined to form another invention. In this case as well, the same effect as described above is achieved.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7b production symbol display area (production symbol display section), 8 production symbol, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first grand prize opening, 35 second grand prize opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect pending display, 103b fourth effect pending display.

Claims (1)

a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a first acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port, with a first number as an upper limit;
a second acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port, with a second number as an upper limit;
a first win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means;
a second win/fail determination capable of executing a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot and a small hit determination for determining whether or not it is a small win based on the acquired information stored in the second acquired information storage means;
a first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first validity determination;
a second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second validity determination;
a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game when the result of the first judgment or the second judgment is a jackpot;
a small winning game execution means that executes a small winning game when the result of the second validity determination is a small winning;
Equipped with
A gaming machine capable of displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel in a variable manner,
As a game area, it has a first game area and a second game area,
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area, the second starting port is provided in the second gaming area,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state, a game based on the first judgment is executed by firing a game ball into the first gaming area;
When the gaming state is the second gaming state, a game mainly based on the second judgment is executed by firing a game ball into the second gaming area,
As the time of the fluctuation display of the first identification information that is executed when the result of the first validity determination is negative, a first failure fluctuation time and a second failure fluctuation time that is longer than the first failure fluctuation time are defined. have,
During the period from when the second gaming state is set until when the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is incorrect. In this case, selecting the first deviation variation time as the time for displaying the variation of the first identification information ,
A first specific fluctuation period, which is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first judgment, includes a first jackpot fluctuation time and a second jackpot fluctuation time longer than the first jackpot fluctuation time. 2. Has a jackpot fluctuation time,
If the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, making it impossible to perform a new first validity determination;
When the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the jackpot determination is made impossible and a second win/fail determination is executed in which the small hit determination is executed. ,
The second jackpot fluctuation time is a longer jackpot fluctuation time than the second loss fluctuation time,
During the period from when the second gaming state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is a jackpot. In this case, the second jackpot fluctuation time is selected as the time for the fluctuation display of the first identification information,
In a period after the second gaming state is set and after the variable display of the first identification information is executed a first time, the first validity determination is executed and the result of the first validity determination is a jackpot. In this case, the first jackpot fluctuation time is selected as the time for the fluctuation display of the first identification information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images